Operation Manual
DVD MULTIMEDIA AV NAVIGATION SERVER
AVIC-N5
Notice to all users:
This software requires that the navigation system is
properly connected to your vehicle’s parking brake and
depending on your vehicle, additional installation may
be required. For more information, please contact your
Authorized Pioneer Electronics retailer or call us at
(800) 421-1404.
English
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Contents
3
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Contents
4
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Contents
5
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Contents
6
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Contents
7
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Contents
8
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
Introduction
01
other means. You shall not use the Software to
operate a service bureau or for any other use
involving the processing of data for other per-
sons or entities.
Pioneer and its licensor(s) shall retain all copy-
right, trade secret, patent and other proprie-
tary ownership rights in the Software. The
Software is copyrighted and may not be cop-
ied, even if modified or merged with other pro-
ducts. You shall not alter or remove any
copyright notice or proprietary legend con-
tained in or on the Software.
You may transfer all of your license rights in
the Software, the related documentation and a
copy of this License Agreement to another
party, provided that the party reads and agrees
to accept the terms and conditions of this Li-
cense Agreement.
License Agreement
PIONEER AVIC-N5 - for U.S.A.
THIS IS A LEGAL AGREEMENT BETWEEN
YOU, AS THE END USER, AND PIONEER
ELECTRONICS (USA) INC. (“PIONEER”).
PLEASE READ THE TERMS AND CONDI-
TIONS OF THIS AGREEMENT CAREFULLY BE-
FORE USING THE SOFTWARE INSTALLED ON
THE PIONEER PRODUCTS. BY USING THE
SOFTWARE INSTALLED ON THE PIONEER
PRODUCTS, YOU AGREE TO BE BOUND BY
THE TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT. THE SOFT-
WARE INCLUDES A DATABASE LICENSED BY
THIRD PARTY SUPPLIER( S) (“SUPPLIERS”),
AND YOUR USE OF THE DATABASE IS COV-
ERED BY THE SUPPLIERS’ SEPARATE
TERMS, WHICH ARE ATTACHED TO THIS
NOT AGREE WITH ALL OF THESE TERMS,
PLEASE RETURN THE PIONEER PRODUCTS
(INCLUDING THE SOFTWARE, AND ANY
WRITTEN MATERIALS) WITHIN FIVE (5) DAYS
OF RECEIPT OF THE PRODUCTS, TO THE
AUTHORIZED PIONEER DEALER FROM
WHICH YOU PURCHASED THEM. USE OF
THE SOFTWARE SHALL BE DEEMED TO BE
YOUR CONSENT TO THE LICENSE AGREE-
MENT.
2
DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY
The Software and related documentation are
provided to you “AS IS”. PIONEER AND ITS LI-
CENSOR(S) (for the purpose of provisions 2
and 3, Pioneer and its licensor(s) shall be col-
lectively referred to as “Pioneer”) MAKES AND
YOU RECEIVE NO WARRANTY FOR THE SOFT-
WARE, WHETHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
AND ALL WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABIL-
ITY AND FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR
PURPOSE FOR THE SOFTWARE ARE EX-
PRESSLY EXCLUDED. SOME STATES DO NOT
ALLOW EXCLUSION OF IMPLIED WARRAN-
TIES, SO THE ABOVE EXCLUSION MAY NOT
APPLY TO YOU. The Software is complex and
may contain some nonconformities, defects or
errors. Pioneer does not warrant that the Soft-
ware will meet your needs or expectations,
that operation of the Software will be error free
or uninterrupted, or that all non-conformities
can or will be corrected. Furthermore, Pioneer
does not make any representations or warran-
ties regarding the use or results of the use of
the Software in terms of its accuracy, reliability
or otherwise.
1
GRANT OF LICENSE
Pioneer grants to you a non-transferable, non
exclusive license to use the software installed
on the Pioneer products (the “Software”) and
the related documentation solely for your own
personal use or for internal use by your busi-
ness, only on such Pioneer products.
You shall not copy, reverse engineer, translate,
port, modify or make derivative works of the
Software. You shall not loan, rent, disclose,
publish, sell, assign, lease, sublicense, market
or otherwise transfer the Software or use it in
any manner not expressly authorized by this
agreement. You shall not derive or attempt to
derive the source code or structure of all or
any portion of the Software by reverse engi-
neering, disassembly, decompilation, or any
9
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
01
Introduction
3
LIMITATION OF LIABILITY
regulations of the United States. If the Soft-
ware has been rightfully obtained by you out-
side of the United States, you agree that you
will not re-export the Software nor any other
technical data received from Pioneer, nor the
direct product thereof, except as permitted by
the laws and regulations of the United States
and the laws and regulations of the jurisdic-
tion in which you obtained the Software.
IN NO EVENT SHALL PIONEER BE LIABLE
FOR ANY DAMAGES, CLAIM OR LOSS IN-
CURRED BY YOU (INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIM-
ITATION, COMPENSATORY, INCIDENTAL,
INDIRECT, SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, OR
EXEMPLARY DAMAGES, LOST PROFITS, LOST
INCOME, LOST SALES OR BUSINESS, EXPEN-
DITURES, INVESTMENTS, OR COMMITMENTS
IN CONNECTION WITH ANY BUSINESS, LOSS
OF ANY GOODWILL, OR DAMAGES) RESULT-
ING FROM THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE
THE SOFTWARE, EVEN IF PIONEER HAS
BEEN INFORMED OF, KNEW OF, OR SHOULD
HAVE KNOWN OF THE LIKELIHOOD OF
SUCH DAMAGES. THIS LIMITATION APPLIES
TO ANY AND ALL CAUSES OF ACTION INDIVI-
DUALLY OR IN THE AGGREGATE, INCLUDING
WITHOUT LIMITATION BREACH OF CON-
TRACT, BREACH OF WARRANTY, NEGLI-
GENCE, STRICT LIABILITY,
MISREPRESENTATION, AND OTHER TORTS.
IF PIONEER’S WARRANTY DISCLAIMER OR
LIMITATION OF LIABILITY SET FORTH IN THIS
AGREEMENT SHALL OR FOR ANY REASON
WHATSOEVER BE HELD UNENFORCEABLE
OR INAPPLICABLE, YOU AGREE THAT
PIONEER’S LIABILITY SHALL NOT EXCEED
FIFTY PERCENT (50%) OF THE PRICE PAID BY
YOU FOR THE ENCLOSED PIONEER PRO-
DUCT.
5
TERMINATION
This Agreement is effective until terminated.
You may terminate it at any time by destroying
the Software. The Agreement also will termi-
nate if you do not comply with any terms or
conditions of this Agreement. Upon such ter-
mination, you agree to destroy the Software.
6
U.S. GOVERNMENT END USERS
If the Software is being acquired by or on be-
half of the United States government or any
other entity seeking or applying rights similar
to those customarily claimed by the United
States government, the Data is licensed with
“Limited Rights”. Utilization of the Software is
subject to the restrictions specified in the
“Rights in Technical Data” clause at DFARS
252.227-7013, or the equivalent clause for non-
defense agencies. Pioneer Electronics (USA)
Inc., 2265 East 220th Street, Long Beach, CA
90810.
Some states do not allow the exclusion or lim-
itation of incidental or consequential da-
mages, so the above limitation or exclusion
may not apply to you. This warranty disclaimer
and limitation of liability shall not be applic-
able to the extent that they are prohibited by
any applicable federal, state or local law which
provides that such a disclaimer or limitation
cannot be waived or preempted.
7
MISCELLANEOUS
This is the entire Agreement between Pioneer
and you regarding its subject matter. No
change in this Agreement shall be effective
unless agreed to in writing by Pioneer. Pioneer
retailers do not have the authority to change
this Agreement. This Agreement shall be gov-
erned by and construed in accordance with
the internal laws of the State of California. If
any provision of this Agreement is declared in-
valid or unenforceable, the remaining provi-
sions of this Agreement shall remain in full
force and effect.
4
EXPORT LAW ASSURANCES
You agree and certify that neither the Software
nor any other technical data received from
Pioneer, nor the direct product thereof, will be
exported outside the United States except as
authorized and as permitted by the laws and
10
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
Introduction
01
operate a service bureau or for any other use
involving the processing of data for other per-
sons or entities.
PIONEER AVIC-N5 - for Canada
THIS IS A LEGAL AGREEMENT BETWEEN
YOU, AS THE END USER, AND PIONEER
ELECTRONICS OF CANADA, INC.
Pioneer and its licensor(s) shall retain all copy-
right, trade secret, patent and other proprie-
tary ownership rights in the Software. The
Software is copyrighted and may not be cop-
ied, even if modified or merged with other pro-
ducts. You shall not alter or remove any
copyright notice or proprietary legend con-
tained in or on the Software.
You may transfer all of your license rights in
the Software, the related documentation and a
copy of this License Agreement to another
party, provided that the party reads and agrees
to accept the terms and conditions of this Li-
cense Agreement.
(“PIONEER”). PLEASE READ THE TERMS AND
CONDITIONS OF THIS AGREEMENT CARE-
FULLY BEFORE USING THE SOFTWARE IN-
STALLED ON THE PIONEER PRODUCTS. BY
USING THE SOFTWARE INSTALLED ON THE
PIONEER PRODUCTS, YOU AGREE TO BE
BOUND BY THE TERMS OF THIS AGREE-
MENT. THE SOFTWARE INCLUDES A DATA-
BASE LICENSED BY THIRD PARTY SUPPLIER
(S) (“SUPPLIERS”), AND YOUR USE OF THE
DATABASE IS COVERED BY THE SUPPLIERS’
SEPARATE TERMS, WHICH ARE ATTACHED
YOU DO NOT AGREE WITH ALL OF THESE
TERMS, PLEASE RETURN THE PIONEER PRO-
DUCTS (INCLUDING THE SOFTWARE, AND
ANY WRITTEN MATERIALS) WITHIN FIVE (5)
DAYS OF RECEIPT OF THE PRODUCTS, TO
THE AUTHORIZED PIONEER DEALER FROM
WHICH YOU PURCHASED THEM. USE OF
THE SOFTWARE SHALL BE DEEMED TO BE
YOUR CONSENT TO THE LICENSE AGREE-
MENT.
2
DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY
The Software and related documentation are
provided to you “AS IS”. PIONEER AND ITS LI-
CENSOR(S) (for the purpose of provisions 2
and 3, Pioneer and its licensor(s) shall be col-
lectively referred to as “Pioneer”) MAKES AND
YOU RECEIVE NO WARRANTY FOR THE SOFT-
WARE, WHETHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
AND ALL WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABIL-
ITY AND FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR
PURPOSE FOR THE SOFTWARE ARE EX-
PRESSLY EXCLUDED. SOME STATES DO NOT
ALLOW EXCLUSION OF IMPLIED WARRAN-
TIES, SO THE ABOVE EXCLUSION MAY NOT
APPLY TO YOU. The Software is complex and
may contain some nonconformities, defects or
errors. Pioneer does not warrant that the Soft-
ware will meet your needs or expectations,
that operation of the Software will be error free
or uninterrupted, or that all non-conformities
can or will be corrected. Furthermore, Pioneer
does not make any representations or warran-
ties regarding the use or results of the use of
the Software in terms of its accuracy, reliability
or otherwise.
1
GRANT OF LICENSE
Pioneer grants to you a non-transferable, non
exclusive license to use the software installed
on the Pioneer products (the “Software”) and
the related documentation solely for your own
personal use or for internal use by your busi-
ness, only on such Pioneer products.
You shall not copy, reverse engineer, translate,
port, modify or make derivative works of the
Software. You shall not loan, rent, disclose,
publish, sell, assign, lease, sublicense, market
or otherwise transfer the Software or use it in
any manner not expressly authorized by this
agreement. You shall not derive, or attempt to
derive, the source code or structure of all or
any portion of the Software by reverse engi-
neering, disassembly, decompilation, or any
other means. You shall not use the Software to
11
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
01
Introduction
3
LIMITATION OF LIABILITY
obtained by you outside of Canada, you agree
that you will not re-export the Software nor any
other technical data received from Pioneer,
nor the direct product thereof, except as per-
mitted by the laws and regulations of Canada
and the laws and regulations of the jurisdic-
tion in which you obtained the Software.
IN NO EVENT SHALL PIONEER BE LIABLE
FOR ANY DAMAGES, CLAIM OR LOSS IN-
CURRED BY YOU (INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIM-
ITATION, COMPENSATORY, INCIDENTAL,
INDIRECT, SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, OR
EXEMPLARY DAMAGES, LOST PROFITS, LOST
SALES OR BUSINESS, EXPENDITURES, IN-
VESTMENTS, OR COMMITMENTS IN CON-
NECTION WITH ANY BUSINESS, LOSS OF
ANY GOODWILL, OR DAMAGES) RESULTING
FROM THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE
THE SOFTWARE, EVEN IF PIONEER HAS
BEEN INFORMED OF, KNEW OF, OR SHOULD
HAVE KNOWN OF THE LIKELIHOOD OF
SUCH DAMAGES. THIS LIMITATION APPLIES
TO ALL CAUSES OF ACTION IN THE AGGRE-
GATE, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION
BREACH OF CONTRACT, BREACH OF WAR-
RANTY, NEGLIGENCE, STRICT LIABILITY, MIS-
REPRESENTATION, AND OTHER TORTS. IF
PIONEER’S WARRANTY DISCLAIMER OR
LIMITATION OF LIABILITY SET FORTH IN THIS
AGREEMENT SHALL OR FOR ANY REASON
WHATSOEVER BE HELD UNENFORCEABLE
OR INAPPLICABLE, YOU AGREE THAT
PIONEER’S LIABILITY SHALL NOT EXCEED
FIFTY PERCENT (50%) OF THE PRICE PAID BY
YOU FOR THE ENCLOSED PIONEER PRO-
DUCT.
5
TERMINATION
This Agreement is effective until terminated.
You may terminate it at any time by destroying
the Software. The Agreement also will termi-
nate if you do not comply with any terms or
conditions of this Agreement. Upon such ter-
mination, you agree to destroy the Software.
6
MISCELLANEOUS
This is the entire Agreement between Pioneer
and you regarding its subject matter. No
change in this Agreement shall be effective
unless agreed to in writing by Pioneer. Pioneer
retailers do not have the authority to change
this Agreement. This Agreement shall be gov-
erned by and construed in accordance with
the internal laws of the Province of Ontario
and the federal laws of Canada applicable
therein. If any provision of this Agreement is
declared invalid or unenforceable, the remain-
ing provisions of this Agreement shall remain
in full force and effect.
Some states do not allow the exclusion or lim-
itation of incidental or consequential da-
mages, so the above limitation or exclusion
may not apply to you. This warranty disclaimer
and limitation of liability shall not be applic-
able to the extent that they are prohibited by
any applicable federal, state or local law which
provides that such a disclaimer or limitation
cannot be waived or preempted.
4
EXPORT LAW ASSURANCES
You agree and certify that neither the Software
nor any other technical data received from
Pioneer, nor the direct product thereof, will be
exported outside Canada except as authorized
and as permitted by the laws and regulations
of Canada. If the Software has been rightfully
12
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
Introduction
01
CHANTABILITY, SATISFACTORY QUALITY, AC-
CURACY, TITLE AND FITNESS FOR A
Terms and Conditions for the
Tele Atlas Data
THIS IS A LEGAL AGREEMENT (THE “AGREE-
MENT”) BETWEEN YOU, THE END USER, AND
TELE ATLAS NORTH AMERICA, INC. (“Tele
Atlas”). BY USING YOUR COPY OF THE TELE
ATLAS DATA, YOU AGREE TO THE TERMS
AND CONDITIONS OF THIS AGREEMENT.
PARTICULAR PURPOSE. NO ORAL OR WRIT-
TEN ADVICE OR INFORMATION PROVIDED
BY TELE ATLAS OR ANY OF ITS AGENTS, EM-
PLOYEES OR THIRD PARTY PROVIDERS
SHALL CREATE A WARRANTY, AND YOU ARE
NOT ENTITLED TO RELY ON ANY SUCH AD-
VICE OR INFORMATION. THIS DISCLAIMER
OF WARRANTIES IS AN ESSENTIAL CONDI-
TION OF THE AGREEMENT.
1
Grant of License.
Tele Atlas grants you a non-transferable, non-
exclusive license to use the map data and
business points of interest information (the
“POIs”), (together, the “Data”) contained on
these discs, solely for personal, non-commer-
cial use and not to operate a service bureau or
for any other use involving the processing of
data of other persons or entities. You may
make one (1) copy of the Data for archival or
backup purposes only but you may not other-
wise copy, reproduce, modify, make derivative
works, derive the structure of or reverse engi-
neer the Data. The Data contains confidential
and proprietary information and materials,
and may contain trade secrets, so you agree to
hold the Data in confidence and in trust and
not to disclose the Data or any portions in any
form, including by renting, leasing, publish-
ing, leasing, sublicensing or transferring the
Data to any third party. You are prohibited
from removing or obscuring any copyright, tra-
demark notice or restrictive legend.
4
Limitation of Liability.
TELE ATLAS SHALL NOT BE LIABLE TO YOU
FOR ANY INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL,
SPECIAL, INDIRECT OR EXEMPLARY DA-
MAGES ARISING OUT OF THIS AGREEMENT,
INCLUDING LOST PROFITS OR COSTS OF
COVER, LOSS OF USE OR BUSINESS INTER-
RUPTION OR THE LIKE, REGARDLESS OF
WHETHER YOU WERE ADVISED OF THE POS-
SIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. NOTWITH-
STANDING ANYTHING TO THE CONTRARY
CONTAINED HEREIN, TELE ATLAS SHALL
HAVE NO MONETARY LIABILITY TO YOU FOR
ANY CAUSE (REGARDLESS OF THE FORM OF
ACTION) UNDER OR RELATING TO THIS
AGREEMENT.
5
Termination.
This Agreement will terminate immediately
and automatically, without notice, if you
breach any term of this Agreement. You agree
that in the event of termination of the Agree-
ment, you shall return the Data (including all
documentation and all copies) to Tele Atlas
and its suppliers.
2
Ownership.
The Data is copyrighted by Tele Atlas and its li-
censors and they retain all ownership rights in
the Data. You agree not to alter, remove, oblit-
erate, or obscure any copyright notice or pro-
prietary legend contained in or on the Data.
3
Warranty Disclaimer.
THE DATA IS PROVIDED ON AN “AS IS” AND
“WITH ALL FAULTS BASIS” AND TELE ATLAS
AND ITS SUPPLIERS EXPRESSLY DISCLAIM
ALL WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, IN-
CLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF NON-INFRINGEMENT, MER-
13
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
01
Introduction
6
Indemnity.
it is agreed that the Data is a trade secret and
a proprietary commercial product and not sub-
ject to disclosure.
You agree to indemnify, defend and hold Tele
Atlas, its Licensors, and its Suppliers (includ-
ing their respective licensors, suppliers, as-
signees, subsidiaries, affiliated companies,
and the respective officers, directors, employ-
ees, shareholders, agents and representatives)
free and harmless from and against any liabili-
ty, loss, injury (including injuries resulting in
death), demand, action, cost, expense, or
claim of any kind or character, including but
not limited to attorney’s fees, arising out of or
in connection with any use or possession by
you of the Data.
If you are an agency, department, or other en-
tity of any State government, the United States
Government or any other public entity or
funded in whole or in part by the United States
Government, then you hereby agree to protect
the Data from public disclosure and to consid-
er the Data exempt from any statute, law, regu-
lation, or code, including any Sunshine Act,
Public Records Act, Freedom of Information
Act, or equivalent, which permits public ac-
cess and/or reproduction or use of the Data.
In the event that such exemption is challenged
under any such laws, this Agreement shall be
considered breached and any and all right to
retain any copies or to use of the Data shall be
terminated and considered immediately null
and void. Any copies of the Data held by you
shall immediately be destroyed. If any court of
competent jurisdiction considers this clause
void and unenforceable, in whole or in part,
for any reason, this Agreement shall be con-
sidered terminated and null and void, in its en-
tirety, and any and all copies of the Data shall
immediately be destroyed.
7
U.S. Government Rights.
If you are an agency, department, or other en-
tity of the United States Government, or
funded in whole or in part by the United States
Government, then use, duplication, reproduc-
tion, release, modification, disclosure or trans-
fer of this commercial product and
accompanying documentation, is restricted in
accordance with the LIMITED or RESTRICTED
rights as described in DFARS 252.227-7014(a)
(1) (JUN 1995) (DOD commercial computer
software definition), DFARS 227.7202-1 (DOD
policy on commercial computer software),
FAR 52.227-19 (JUN 1987) (commercial com-
puter software clause for civilian agencies),
DFARS 252.227-7015 (NOV 1995) (DOD techni-
cal data – commercial items clause); FAR
52.227-14 Alternates I, II, and III (JUN 1987) (ci-
vilian agency technical data and noncommer-
cial computer software clause); and/or FAR
12.211 and FAR 12.212 (commercial item ac-
quisitions), as applicable. In case of conflict
between any of the FAR and DFARS provisions
listed herein and this License, the construc-
tion that provides greater limitations on the
Government’s rights shall control. Contractor/
manufacturer is Tele Atlas North America,
Inc., 11 Lafayette Street, Lebanon, NH 03766-
1445. Phone: 603.643. 0330. The Data is
8
Additional Provisions with respect to
POI Data only.
a
b
c
No Creation of Mailing Lists.
You are prohibited from using the POIs (i) to
create mailing lists or (ii) for other such si-
milar uses.
Compliance.
You will use the POIs in compliance with all
applicable federal, state and local laws,
rules and regulations.
Indemnification.
You shall indemnify and hold infoUSA, Inc.
harmless against all third party claims or
liability which are based in whole or in part
of the users failure to comply with such
laws, rules and regulations or which result
from the use of the POIs through you.
Warranty.
©1984-2008 by Tele Atlas. ALL RIGHTS RE-
SERVED. For purpose of any public disclosure
provision under any federal, state or local law,
d
14
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
Introduction
01
In addition to the Warranties contained in
the Agreement, YOU UNDERSTAND THAT
THE POIS ARE LICENSED ON AN “AS IS”
BASIS WITHOUT GUARANTEE, AND
THERE ARE NO OTHER WARRANTIES
MADE WHETHER, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
or unenforceable, such provision or part there-
of shall be stricken from this Agreement and
the remainder of this Agreement shall be
valid, legal, and enforceable to the maximum
extent possible. Any notice under this Agree-
ment shall be delivered by courier to Tele Atlas
North America, Inc., Attention Contracts De-
partment, 11 Lafayette Street, Lebanon, NH
03766 USA. The covenants and obligations un-
dertaken by you herein are intended for the di-
rect benefit of Tele Atlas and may be enforced
by Tele Atlas directly against you.
e
POIs Segregation.
You are prohibited from combining or mer-
ging the POIs with any other POI data. The
POIs shall be maintained in such a way
that they are separately identifiable from all
other POI data at all times.
About the Data for the Map
Database
9
Agreement in English.
!
!
!
This database was developed and recorded
up to May 2007. Changes to streets/high-
ways made after that time may not be re-
flected in this database.
It is strictly prohibited to reproduce and use
any part or the whole of this map in any
form without permission from the copyright
owner.
If the local traffic regulations or conditions
deviate from this data, follow the local traf-
fic regulations (such as signs, indications,
etc.) and conditions (such as construction,
weather, etc.).
The parties hereto confirm that they have re-
quested that this Agreement and all attach-
ments and related documents be drafted in
English.
Les parties ont exigé que le présent contrat et
tous les documents attachés soient rédigés en
Anglais.
10 Miscellaneous.
This is the exclusive and complete Agreement
between Tele Atlas and you regarding its sub-
ject matter. Nothing in this Agreement shall
create a joint venture, partnership or principal-
agent relationship between Tele Atlas and you.
The internal laws of California shall govern
this Agreement and you consent to the juris-
diction of the Northern District of California or
the State of California for the County of Santa
Clara. Sections 2 – 10 shall survive the expira-
tion or termination of this Agreement. This
Agreement may be amended, altered, or modi-
fied only by Tele Atlas. You may not assign any
part of this Agreement without Tele Atlas’ prior
written consent. You acknowledge and under-
stand that the Data may be subject to restric-
tions on exportation and agree to comply with
any applicable export laws. In the event that
any provision or part of a provision of this
Agreement is determined to be invalid, illegal,
!
The traffic regulation data used in the map
database applies only to standard sized
passenger vehicles. Note that regulations
for larger vehicles, motorbikes, and other
non-standard vehicles are not included in
the database.
15
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
01
Introduction
Copyright Notices for
North American data
Manual Overview
This manual provides the important informa-
tion you need to make full use of your new na-
vigation system. Please note that when you
have decided what you want to do, you can
find the page you need from the “Contents”. If
you want to check the meaning of each item
displayed on the screen, you will find the ne-
section at the end of the manual.
1) Tele Atlas® MultiNet® North America data.
As of the Effective Date, the copyright notice
for Tele Atlas® MultiNet® North America is:
NOTICE
© 1984 – 2008 Tele Atlas. All rights reserved.
This material is proprietary and the subject of
copyright protection and other intellectual
property rights owned or licensed to Tele Atlas.
Tele Atlas is an authorized distributor of se-
lected Statistics Canada computer files under
Agreement number 6776. The product in-
cludes information copied with permission
from Canadian authorities, including © Cana-
da Post Corporation and GeoBase®, All rights
reserved. The product is sourced in part from
Geography Division, Statistics Canada, 2006
Road Network File (RNF), 92-500-XWE/XWF.
The incorporation of data sources from Statis-
tics Canada within this product shall not be
construed as constituting an endorsement by
Statistics Canada of such product. The use of
this material is subject to the terms of a Li-
cense Agreement. You will be held liable for
any unauthorized copying or disclosure of this
material.
How to use this manual
For safety reasons, it is particularly important
that you fully understand your navigation sys-
tem before using it. Be sure to read “ Introduc-
tion”, Chapter 2 in particular.
Introduction
This chapter describes the information be-
fore using the navigation system (e.g. Li-
Basic Operation
This chapter describes the names of each
part of the navigation system and the basic
operations of this navigation system. It also
describes basic operations for playing a CD
in the navigation system.
2) As of the Effective Date, the copyright notice
for all third-party brand icons (the “Brand
Icons”) are located in the operator’s manual
included in the Licensed Products.
3) As of the Effective Date, the copyright notice
with logo for infoUSA, Inc. is:
Navigation Menu and Map Display
Describes how to display the navigation
menu screen, and the method of changing
map view or map scale.
Setting a Route to Your Destination
This section describes various ways of
searching the destination, editing the cur-
rent route conditions, and the route opera-
tion during route guidance.
Editing the Navigation Utilities
Describes convenient functions for naviga-
tion, including how to organize information
on places you have visited.
© 2008 INCREMENT P CORP. ALL RIGHTS RE-
SERVED.
16
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
Introduction
01
!
!
Extra information, alternative use and other
notes are presented like this:
e.g.)
p After removing the disc from the slot,
keep it in the case.
The references are indicated like this:
e.g.)
= For details concerning operations, refer
Customizing Your Navigation System
The behavior of your navigation system de-
pends on a number of settings. If you need
to change any of the initial settings (default
settings), read the relevant section of this
chapter.
Using the AV Source (Built-in DVD Drive
and Radio)
Describes how to use DVD-Video, CD, ROM,
DivX and the radio.
Using the AV Source (Pioneer AV Equip-
ment)
About the definition of
terminology
When Pioneer AV equipment is connected
to the navigation system, that equipment
can be operated from the navigation system.
This chapter describes the operation of the
AV source that can be used when Pioneer
AV equipment is connected.
“Front Display” and “Rear Display”
In this manual, the screen that is attached to
the body of this navigation unit will be referred
to as the “Front Display”. Any additional op-
tional screen that is purchased for use in con-
junction with this navigation unit will be
referred to as the “Rear Display”.
Customizing the AV Source Setting
Using the AV source, various settings are
available to suit your audio-visual taste. This
chapter describes how to change the set-
tings.
“Video image”
Appendix
“Video image” in this manual indicates the
moving image of DVD-Video, DivX, iPod vi-
deos, and the equipment that is connected to
this system with a RCA cable, such as a gener-
al-purpose AV equipment.
Read the appendix to learn more about your
navigation system and such information as
manual for checking the details of each
item on the menu.
Terminology
Before moving on, take a few minutes to read
the following information about the conven-
tions used in this manual. Familiarity with
these conventions will help you greatly as you
learn how to use your new equipment.
!
Buttons on your navigation system are de-
scribed in ALL CAPITAL, BOLD lettering:
e.g.)
MENU button, MAP button.
Items in the different menus or touch panel
keys available on the screen are described
in brackets [ ] and bold:
!
e.g.)
[Destination], [Settings].
17
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
01
Introduction
p Never set the volume of your navigation
system so high that you cannot hear out-
side traffic and emergency vehicles.
p To promote safety, certain functions are dis-
abled unless the vehicle is stopped and/or
the parking brake is applied.
p The data encoded in the disc for the naviga-
tion system is the intellectual property of
the provider, and the provider is responsible
for such content.
Important Safety Information
Before using your navigation system, be sure
to read and fully understand the following
safety information:
p Read the entire manual before operating
this navigation system.
p The navigation features of your navigation
system (and rear view camera option if pur-
chased) are intended solely as an aid to
you in the operation of your vehicle. It is
not a substitute for your attentiveness,
judgment, and care when driving.
p Keep this manual handy as a reference for
operating procedures and safety informa-
tion.
p Do not operate this navigation system (or
the rear view camera option if purchased) if
doing so will divert your attention in any
way from the safe operation of your vehicle.
Always observe safe driving rules and fol-
low all existing traffic regulations. If you ex-
perience difficulty in operating the system
or reading the display, park your vehicle in
a safe location and apply the parking brake
before making the necessary adjustments.
p Never allow others to use the system un-
less they have read and understood the op-
erating instructions.
p Never use this navigation system to route
to hospitals, police stations, or similar facil-
ities in an emergency. Please call 911.
p Route and guidance information displayed
by this equipment is for reference purposes
only. It may not accurately reflect the latest
permissible routes, road conditions, one
way streets, road closures, or traffic restric-
tions.
p Pay close attention to all warnings in this
manual and follow the instructions care-
fully.
p Do not install the navigation unit where it
may (i) obstruct the driver’s vision, (ii) im-
pair the performance of any of the vehicle’s
operating systems or safety features, in-
cluding air bags, hazard lamp buttons or
(iii) impair the driver’s ability to safely oper-
ate the vehicle.
p Please remember to wear your seat belt at
all times while operating your vehicle. If
you are ever in an accident, your injuries
can be considerably more severe if your
seat belt is not properly buckled.
p Using the most current map DVDs will
allow for most accurate destination map-
ping. Upgrade DVDs are available for pur-
chase through your local Pioneer dealer.
p Never use headphones while driving.
WARNING
p Traffic restrictions and advisories currently
in force should always take precedence
over guidance given by the navigation sys-
tem. Always obey current traffic restric-
tions, even if the navigation system
Do not attempt to install or service your naviga-
tion system by yourself. Installation or servicing
of the navigation system by persons without train-
ing and experience in electronic equipment and
automotive accessories may be dangerous and
could expose you to the risk of electric shock or
other hazards.
provides contrary advice.
p Failure to input correct information about
the local time may result in the navigation
system providing improper routing and gui-
dance instructions.
18
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
Introduction
01
Notes Before Using the System
After-sales service for Pioneer products
Please contact the dealer or distributor from
which you purchased the product for after-
sales service (including warranty conditions)
or any other information. In case the necessary
information is not available, please contact the
companies listed below.
Information to User
Alteration or modifications carried out without
appropriate authorization may invalidate the
user’s right to operate the equipment.
Please do not ship your product to the compa-
nies at the addresses listed below for repair
without making advance contact.
For Canadian model
This Class B digital apparatus complies with
Canadian ICES-003.
!
U.S.A
Pioneer Electronics (USA) Inc.
CUSTOMER SUPPORT DIVISION
P.O. Box 1760 Long Beach, CA 90801-1760
800-421-1404
Important (Serial Number:)
The serial number of this device is located on the
bottom of this product. For your own security and
convenience, be sure to record this number on
the enclosed warranty card.
!
CANADA
Pioneer Electronics of Canada, Inc.
CUSTOMER SATISFACTION DEPARTMENT
300 Allstate Parkway Markham, Ontario
L3R 0P2
1-877-283-5901
905-479-4411
Failure to operate
Should the navigation system fail to operate
properly, contact your dealer or nearest
authorized Pioneer Service Station.
For warranty information, please see the Lim-
ited Warranty sheet included with your pro-
duct.
Visit Our Web site
Visit us at the following site:
http://www.pioneerelectronics.com
In Canada
http://www.pioneerelectronics.ca
1
Register your product. We will keep the details
of your purchase on file to help you refer to
this information in the event of an insurance
claim such as loss or theft.
2
3
Receive updates on the latest products and
technologies.
Download owner’s manuals, order product
catalogues, research new products, and
much more.
4
Receive notices of software upgrades and
software updates.
19
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
01
Introduction
Precaution
The backlighting lamp of LCD in this
equipment contains mercury. Dispo-
sal of this material may be regulated
due to environmental considerations
according to Local, State or Federal
Laws. For disposal or recycling infor-
mation, please contact your local
authorities or the Electronics Indus-
tries Alliance:
CAUTION:
USE OF CONTROL OR ADJUSTMENT OR PER-
FORMANCE OF PROCEDURES OTHER THAN
THOSE SPECIFIED HEREIN MAY RESULT IN
HAZARDOUS RADIATION EXPOSURE.
CAUTION:
THE USE OF OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS WITH
THIS PRODUCT WILL INCREASE EYE HA-
ZARD.
www.eiae.org
CAUTION
!
!
Protect this product from moisture.
If the battery is disconnected or dis-
charged, the memory will be erased and
must be reprogrammed.
Do not allow this product to come into contact
with liquids. Electrical shock could result. Also,
damage to the product, smoke, and overheating
could result from contact with liquids.
WARNING
Handling the cord on this product or cords asso-
ciated with accessories sold with the product
may expose you to chemicals listed on proposi-
tion 65 known to the State of California and other
governmental entities to cause cancer and birth
defects or other reproductive harm. Wash hands
after handling.
Additional Safety Information
To ensure safe driving
Parking brake interlock
Certain functions (such as viewing of DVD-
Video and certain touch key operations) of-
fered by this navigation system could be dan-
gerous and/or unlawful if used while driving.
To prevent such functions from being used
while the vehicle is in motion, there is an inter-
lock system that senses when the parking
brake is set and when the vehicle is moving. If
you attempt to use the functions described
above while driving, they will become disabled
until you stop the vehicle in a safe place, and
apply the parking brake. Please keep the brake
pedal pushed down before releasing the park-
ing brake.
This product contains mercury. Dis-
posal of this material may be regu-
lated due to environmental
considerations. For disposal or recy-
cling information, please contact
your local authorities or the Electro-
nics Industries Alliance:
www.eiae.org
WARNING
!
To avoid the risk of damage and injury and the
potential violation of applicable laws, the navi-
gation system is not for use with a “Video
image” that is visible to the driver.
20
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
Introduction
01
!
!
In some countries the viewing of “Video
image” on a display inside a vehicle even by
persons other than the driver may be illegal.
Where such regulations apply, they must be
obeyed.
When applying the parking brake in order to
view “Video image” or to enable other func-
tions offered by the navigation system, park
your vehicle in a safe place, and keep the
brake pedal pushed down before releasing the
parking brake if the vehicle is parked on a hill
or otherwise might move when releasing the
parking brake.
Color difference of the map
display between day and night
Night display
The examples in this manual are illustrated
using the daytime display. When driving at
night, the colors you see may differ from those
shown.
= For details concerning operations, refer to
CAUTION
!
Accuracy/performance of interlock may be im-
pacted by such factors as GPS signal detec-
tion, speed pulse wire connectivity, and
driving habits or conditions of the place where
the vehicle is parked.
When using a display connected
to REAR OUT (VIDEO OUT)
This product’s REAR OUT (VIDEO OUT) is for
connection of a display to enable passengers
in the rear seats to watch video images.
!
!
It is strongly suggested that the speed pulse
wire be connected for accuracy of navigation
and better performance of interlock.
If the speed pulse wire is unavailable for some
reason, it is recommended that the pulse gen-
erator ND-PG1 (sold separately) be used.
WARNING
NEVER install the Rear Display in a location that
enables the driver to watch video images while
driving.
When you attempt to watch “Video image”
while driving, the warning “Viewing of front
seat video source while driving is strictly
prohibited.” will appear on the screen. To
watch “Video image” on this display, stop the
vehicle in a safe place and apply the parking
brake. Please keep the brake pedal pushed
down before releasing the parking brake.
To avoid battery exhaustion
Be sure to run the vehicle engine while using
this product. Using this product without run-
ning the engine can result in battery drainage.
WARNING
Do not use with vehicles that do not feature an
ACC position.
Rear view camera
With an optional rear view camera, you are
able to use the navigation system as an aid to
keep an eye on trailers, or backing into a tight
parking spot.
21
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
01
Introduction
Variety of view modes
Various types of screen display can be se-
lected for navigation guidance.
WARNING
!
!
SCREEN IMAGE MAY APPEAR REVERSED.
USE INPUT ONLY FOR REVERSE OR MIRROR
IMAGE REAR VIEW CAMERA. OTHER USE
MAY RESULT IN INJURY OR DAMAGE.
CAUTION
!
!
The rear view camera function is to be used
as an aid to keep an eye on trailers, or while
backing up. Do not use for entertainment pur-
poses.
Wide variety of facility
information for Points of
Interest (POI) Search
You can search your destination from all
areas. Approximately 12.3 million POIs are in-
cluded in the database.
Please note that the edges of the rear view
camera images may differ slightly according
to whether full screen images are displayed
when backing up, and whether the images are
used for checking the rear when the vehicle is
moving forward.
Some POI information may not be accurate or
may become inaccurate through the passage
of time. Please directly contact the POI to veri-
fy the accuracy of the information about the
POI which appears in this database. POI infor-
mation is subject to change without notice.
CAUTION
The rear view mode is to use the navigation sys-
tem as an aid to keep an eye on the trailers, or
while backing up. Do not use this function for en-
tertainment purposes.
Purchasing software upgrade
Auto Reroute Function
Using the most current map DVDs will allow
for most accurate destination mapping. Up-
grade DVDs are available for purchase
through your local Pioneer dealer.
If you deviate from the set route, the system
will re-calculate the route from that point so
that you remain on track to the destination.
p This function may not work in certain
areas.
Features
Touch panel key operation
Assign an Original Image as a
Background Image
It is possible to operate the navigation func-
tion and the audio function by using touch
panel key.
You can store your own pictures on a CD-R/-
RW and DVD-R/-RW in JPEG format and im-
port original images in this navigation system.
These imported images can be set as a back-
ground image.
p Imported original images will be stored in
the memory, but saving cannot be guaran-
teed completely. If original image data is
deleted, set the CD-R/-RW and DVD-R/-RW
again and re-import the original image.
Compatible with the memory
navi mode
Memory navigation functions are provided
with the hardware. For details, refer to Memory
22
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
Introduction
01
DVD-Video playback
AAC file playback
It is possible to play back DVD-Video, DVD-R
(video mode) and DVD-RW (video mode).
p Remember that use of this system for com-
mercial or public viewing purposes may
constitute an infringement on the author’s
rights protected by the Copyright Law.
You can play back AAC files recorded on CD-
R/-RW/-ROM and DVD-R/-RW/-ROM.
DivX® video file playback
You can play back DivX video files recorded on
CD-R/-RW/-ROM and DVD-R/-RW/-ROM.
NTSC compatibility
This product is NTSC system compatible.
When connecting other components to the
product, be sure components are compatible
with the same video system or else images will
not be correctly reproduced.
CD playback
Music CD/CD-R/CD-RW playback is possible.
Auto CD title and MP3/WMA/
AAC file listing
Title lists will automatically be displayed when
a CD TEXT, MP3, WMA or AAC disc is played.
This system provides easy-to-operate audio
functions that allow playback simply by select-
ing an item from the list.
MP3 file playback
It is possible to play back MP3 files recorded
on CD-R/-RW/-ROM and DVD-R/-RW/-ROM.
p Supply of this navigation system only con-
veys a license for private, non-commercial
use and does not convey a license nor
imply any right to use this product in any
commercial (i.e. revenuegenerating) real
time broadcasting (terrestrial, satellite,
cable and/or any other media), broadcast-
ing/streaming via internet, intranets and/or
other networks or in other electronic con-
tent distribution systems, such as pay-
audio or audio-on-demand applications. An
independent license for such use is re-
quired. For details, please visit
iPod® compatibility
When you use this navigation system with the
Interface cable for iPod® (CD-I200) (sold sepa-
rately), you can control an iPod with Dock con-
nector.
For more details about iPod compatibility with
this navigation system, check the information
on our website.
p To obtain maximum performance, we re-
commend that you use the latest version of
the iPod software.
p Operations may vary depending on the soft-
ware version of iPod.
http://www.mp3licensing.com.
p iPod is a trademark of Apple Inc., regis-
tered in the U.S. and other countries.
WMA file playback
You can play back WMA files recorded on CD-
R/-RW/-ROM and DVD-R/-RW/-ROM.
23
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
01
Introduction
logos and Symbol are trademarks of DTS, Inc.
© 1996-2007 DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
Hands-free phoning
Using Bluetooth adapter (e.g. CD-BTB200)
(sold separately), this unit realizes effortless
hands-free phoning with Bluetooth wireless
technology.
Multi-aspect
Switching between wide screen, letter box and
panscan display is possible.
Bluetooth audio player
compatibility
Using a Bluetooth adapter (e.g. CD-BTB200)
(sold separately), you can control a Bluetooth
audio player featuring Bluetooth wireless tech-
nology.
Multi-audio, Multi-subtitle, and
Multi-angle
You can switch between multiple audio sys-
tems, subtitle languages and multiple viewing
angles of a scene recorded on a DVD as de-
sired.
p This product incorporates copyright protec-
tion technology that is protected by method
claims of certain U.S. patents and other in-
tellectual property rights owned by
Dolby Digital
When using Pioneer multi-channel processors
that are planned to be compatible with this na-
vigation system, please consult your dealer or
nearest authorized Pioneer Service Station.
p Manufactured under license from Dolby
Laboratories. “Dolby” and the double-D
symbol are trademarks of Dolby
Macrovision Corporation and other rights
owners. Use of this copyright protection
technology must be authorized by
Macrovision Corporation, and is intended
for home and other limited viewing uses
only unless otherwise authorized by
Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engi-
neering or disassembly is prohibited.
Laboratories.
Rear entertainment
Video from sources with video can be dis-
played on the rear display.
About DTS sound
Only digital output of DTS audio is possible. If
this unit’s optical digital outputs are not con-
nected, DTS audio will not be output, so select
an audio setting other than DTS.
Rear view camera ready
You can display what is behind the vehicle if
connected to a rear view camera (e.g. ND-
BC2) (sold separately).
Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent
#: 5,451,942 & other U.S. and worldwide pa-
tents issued & pending. DTS and DTS Digital
Out are registered trademarks and the DTS
24
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
Introduction
01
p Depending on the amount of data being
transmitted in your area, it may take several
minutes to display all of the available data.
p The information content depends on the in-
formation provided by XM NavTraffic Ser-
vice, including data refreshing and
Data communication function
with XM tuner
If you connect the optional XM tuner (GEX-
P10XMT) to the navigation system, you can
use traffic information as a part of the naviga-
tion function. A separate subscription for XM
NavTraffic is required.
In addition, if you subscribe to XM Audio ser-
vices, you can utilize the XM display featuring
station logos and category icons, to improve
your XM Audio experience.
availability timing.
p Pioneer does not bear responsibility for the
accuracy of the information transmitted.
p Pioneer does not bear responsibility for
changes to information services provided
by XM, such as cancellation of the services
or subscription updates.
p Traffic information is not taken into account
when calculating estimated time of arrival
time or travel time for your destination.
p The broadcast station icons contained on
this disc are based on the data provided by
XM Satellite Radio as of October 2007. Any
subsequent changes made by XM Satellite
Radio in the lineup or icon of the broadcast
station in the future may not be supported
by the navigation system, and may cause
the unit not to display the correct icons.
Playable Discs
About DVD-Video and CD
DVD and CD discs that display the logos
shown below generally can be played back on
this built-in DVD drive.
DVD-Video
About XM NavTraffic Service
and Pioneer Navigation
p XM NavTraffic subscription is required and
is available only in select markets. Check
www.xmnavtraffic.com for service availabil-
ity, pricing information, and other details.
The availability of XM NavTraffic data de-
pends on the ability of the antenna to re-
ceive a signal. The signal may be
CD
unavailable if obstructed (e.g., by buildings,
mountains, trees, bridges, bad weather,
etc.). XM NavTraffic data also may be una-
vailable or not current if the original data
source is not providing data (e.g., sched-
uled or unscheduled downtime) or has not
been updated, or if there is a time lag be-
tween the time when the original data
source is updated and when you receive
the updated XM NavTraffic data.
p
is a trademark of DVD Format/Logo
Licensing Corporation.
p It is not possible to play back DVD-Audio
discs. This DVD drive may not be able to
play all discs bearing the marks shown
above.
25
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
01
Introduction
About AVCHD recorded discs
Mark
Meaning
This unit is not compatible with discs recorded
in AVCHD (Advanced Video Codec High Defi-
nition) format. Do not insert AVCHD discs. If
inserted, the disc may not be ejected.
Indicates the number of audio sys-
tems.
2
Indicates the number of subtitle lan-
guages.
2
Indicates the number of viewing an-
gles.
3
About Dual layer disc
Indicates the picture size (aspect ratio:
screen width-to-height ratio) type.
The unit cannot play back DVD-R/-RW discs
that are written in Layer Jump Recording
mode. For more information about the writing
method, see the operation manual for the writ-
ing device.
16 : 9 LB
1
Indicates the number of the region
where playback is possible.
ALL
If marks other than those listed are found on
DVD disc labels and packages, please ask the
DVD disc supplier for their meaning.
About DVD Map Disc
You can use discs intended for this navigation
system. Use only discs approved by Pioneer.
About WMA
DVD-Video disc region numbers
DVD-Video discs that have incompatible re-
gion numbers cannot be played on this DVD
drive. The region number of the player can be
found on the bottom of this product. The illus-
tration below shows the regions and corre-
sponding region numbers.
The Windows Media™ logo printed on the box
indicates that this unit can play back WMA
data. WMA is short for Windows Media Audio
and refers to an audio compression technol-
ogy that is developed by Microsoft
Corporation. WMA data can be encoded by
using Windows Media Player version 7 or
later. Windows Media and the Windows logo
are trademarks or registered trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation in the United States
and/or other countries.
Notes
!
!
This unit may not operate correctly depending
on the application used to encode WMA files.
Depending on the version of Windows Media
Player used to encode WMA files, album
names and other text information may not be
correctly displayed.
What the Marks on DVDs
Indicate
The marks below may be found on DVD disc
labels and packages. They indicate the type of
images and audio recorded on the disc, and
the functions you can use.
26
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
Introduction
01
!
There may be a slight delay when starting
playback of WMA files encoded with image
data.
About the SAT RADIO
READY Logo
About AAC
The SAT RADIO READY logo printed below the
CD loading slot indicates that the Satellite
Radio Tuner for Pioneer (i. e., XM tuner and
Sirius satellite tuner which are sold separately)
can be controlled by this navigation system.
Please inquire with your dealer or nearest
authorized Pioneer service station regarding
the satellite radio tuner that can be connected
to this navigation system.
AAC is short for Advanced Audio Coding and
refers to an audio compression technology
standard used with MPEG-2 and MPEG-4. Sev-
eral applications can be used to encode AAC
files, but file formats and extensions differ de-
pending on the application which is used to
encode. This unit plays back AAC files en-
coded by iTunes® version 4.6.
p iTunes is a trademark of Apple Inc., regis-
tered in the U.S. and other countries.
Note:
The system will use direct satellite-to-receiver
broadcasting technology to provide listeners
in their cars and at home with crystal-clear
sound seamlessly from coast to coast. Satel-
lite radio will create and package over 100
channels of digital- quality music, news,
sports, talk and children’s programming.
“SAT Radio”, the SAT Radio logo and all re-
lated marks are trademarks of Sirius Satellite
Radio inc., and XM Satellite Radio Inc.
About DivX
DivX is a compressed digital video format cre-
ated by the DivX® video codec from DivX, Inc.
This unit can play DivX video files recorded on
CD-R/RW/ROM and DVD-R/RW/ROM discs.
Keeping the same terminology as DVD video,
individual DivX video files are called “Titles”.
When naming files/titles on a CD-R/RW or a
DVD-R/RW disc prior to burning, keep in mind
that by default they will be played in alphabeti-
cal order. Official DivX® Certified product.
Plays all versions of DivX® video (including
DivX® 6) with standard playback of DivX®
media files.
About the XM NAVTRAFFIC
Logo
Required $12.95 basic monthly XM radio sub-
scription and XM NavTraffic service subscrip-
tions sold separately. XM NavTraffic only
available in select markets. Other fees and
taxes, including a one-time activation fee, may
apply. Subscription fee is consumer only. All
fees and programming subject to change.
Subscriptions subject to Customer Agreement
available at xmradio.com. XM radio service
only available in the 48 contiguous United
States and Canada.
p DivX, DivX Certified, and associated logos
are trademarks of DivX, Inc. and are used
under license.
27
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
01
Introduction
© 2008 XM Satellite Radio Inc. All rights re-
served.
Resetting the Microprocessor
CAUTION
Pressing RESET button deletes the contents of
the system’s memory.
About the data being deleted
NAVTEQ Traffic™ is a trademark of NAVTEQ
North America, LLC.
© 2008. NAVTEQ North America, LLC.
The information is erased by pressing RESET
button or disconnecting the yellow lead from
the battery (or removing the battery itself).
However, the following items are not erased:
!
!
Sensor learning status and driving status
Memory areas that were memorized manu-
ally
Designate Areas to Avoid
Registered Locations in “Address Book”
Data registered in “Emergency Info”
To Protect the LCD Panel
and Screen
!
!
!
p Do not allow direct sunlight to fall on the
LCD screen when this product is not being
used. Extended exposure to direct sunlight
can result in LCD screen malfunction due
to the resulting high temperatures.
p When using a cellular phone, keep the an-
tenna of the cellular phone away from the
display to prevent disruption of the video by
the appearance of spots, colored stripes,
etc.
Reset the navigation system to
the initial (factory) setting
Pressing RESET button of the navigation sys-
tem lets you reset the microprocessor to its in-
itial settings.
When you want to erase memorized settings
and return the navigation system to its initial
(factory) settings, carry out the following op-
erations.
p To protect the LCD screen from damage, be
sure to touch the touch panel keys with a
finger. (The stylus is supplied for special ca-
librations. Do not use the stylus for normal
operations.)
%
Press RESET button with a pen tip or
p Using force to manually adjust the LCD
panel angle may damage the LCD panel.
other pointed instrument.
RESET button
For Viewing LCD Comfortably
Due to its construction, the viewing angle of
the LCD screen is limited. The viewing angle
(vertical and horizontal) can be increased,
however, by using Brightness to adjust the
black density of the video. When using for the
first time, adjust the black density in accor-
dance with the viewing angle (vertical and hor-
izontal) to adjust for clear viewing. Dimmer
can also be used to adjust the brightness of
the LCD screen itself to suit your personal pre-
ference.
The microprocessor must be reset under the
following conditions:
!
Prior to using this product for the first time
after installation.
!
If the product fails to operate properly.
28
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
Introduction
01
!
!
!
If there appear to be problems with the op-
eration of the system.
When changing the combination of the
equipment.
When adding/removing additional pro-
ducts that connect to the navigation sys-
tem.
Initial Use
If the initial learning is not complete, following
screen appears.
%
If a message appears, touch [OK].
p If you have connected other equipment (for
example, Bluetooth adapter) to this naviga-
tion system, be sure to reset that equip-
ment too.
When the navigation system begins running
for the first time, the 3D Hybrid Sensor auto-
matically begins initial learning. Positioning is
performed solely by GPS satellites until the 3D
Hybrid Sensor initial learning is complete, so
the location of your vehicle may not be very ac-
curate. This is not an error. When the initial
learning is complete, the location of your vehi-
cle can be detected with high accuracy.
p [Shop Demo] is the demonstration used in
a store. Do not touch [Shop Demo].
DVD Map Discs for Your
Navigation System
Configuration of data recorded
on discs
The map for this navigation system is supplied
on two discs: one for the west and the other
for the east. Please set the disc to use accord-
ing to your destination or current location.
The areas recorded on each disc are as fol-
lows:
= If an error message appears during initial
learning, refer to Messages and how to
West area disc
East area disc
p Removing the disc and inserting other disc
causes the navigation system to automati-
cally restart and reload the new route. (This
automatic “Reroute” operation cannot be
canceled.)
29
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
02
Basic Operation
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
g
f
ae d c b
a
9
8 DETACH button
Press to remove the front panel from the dis-
play unit.
= For details concerning operations, refer
Navigation unit
This chapter gives information about the
names of the parts and the main features
using the buttons.
1 Disc indicator
When a disc is set in navigation system, this
indicator lights.
9 OPEN/CLOSE button
Press to open or close the LCD panel.
Press and hold to display Flap Setup
screen.
= For more details about “Flap Setup”,
2 LCD panel
3 LCD screen
4 AV button
a o/p button
Press to display the AV operation screen.
Press to perform manual seek tuning, fast
forward, reverse and track search controls.
5 MAP button
Press to view the map or change view
mode.
b EJECT button
c PHONE button
6 MENU button
Press to display BT-TEL operation screen.
Press and hold to switch the indication of
sub display in the following order:
Present time — No indication — AV source
information
Press to display the navigation menu or AV
menu.
7 RESET button
= For details concerning operations, refer
= For details concerning operations, refer
d Front panel
30
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
Basic Operation
02
e Disc loading slot
Inserting/Ejecting a Disc
Inserting a disc
f Sub display
Displays the current time or information
about the AV source that is currently play-
ing.
%
Insert a disc into the disc loading slot.
g VOLUME knob
Turn to adjust the AV (Audio and Video) vo-
lume or press to change the AV source.
Press and hold VOLUME knob to switch the
source to mute.
p The DVD drive plays one standard 12-cm or
8-cm (single) disc at a time. Do not use an
adapter when playing 8-cm discs.
p Do not insert anything other than a disc
into the disc loading slot.
Flow from Startup to
Termination
156 and install the program.
1
Start the engine.
Ejecting a disc
The navigation system is also turned on.
After some time, the navigation opening
screen comes on for a few seconds. Then, a
message screen is displayed.
%
Press EJECT button.
The disc is ejected.
p Insert the Pioneer DVD Map Disc to the
Opening and Closing the
LCD panel
disc loading slot.
2
Check the details of the caution mes-
sage and touch [OK].
CAUTION
Do not close the LCD panel with hands by
force. This may cause malfunction.
Keep hands and fingers clear of the display
unit when opening, closing, or adjusting the
LCD panel. Be especially cautious of chil-
dren’s hands and fingers.
You can operate the navigation system by
touching keys displayed on the screen. The
map of your surroundings is displayed.
!
!
3
Turn off the vehicle engine.
This navigation system is also turned off.
p This product also can be switched off by
turning the ACC (ignition) OFF.
The LCD panel will open or close automatically
by turning the ignition switch on or off. You
can turn off the automatic open/close func-
tion.
p The automatic open/close function will op-
erate the display as follows:
— When the ignition switch is turned OFF
while the LCD panel is open, the LCD
panel will close after a few moments.
31
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
02
Basic Operation
— When the ignition switch is turned ON
again (or turned to ACC), the LCD panel
will open automatically.
— Removing or attaching the front panel
will automatically close or open the LCD
panel.
= For details concerning operations, refer
3
Touch [ESC].
p When the ignition switch is turned OFF
after the LCD panel has been closed, turn-
ing the ignition switch ON again (or turning
it to ACC) will not open the LCD panel. In
this case, press OPEN/CLOSE button to
open the LCD panel.
p When closing the LCD panel, check to
make sure that it has closed completely. If
the LCD panel has stopped halfway, leaving
it like this could result in damage.
When Flap Setup screen is displayed during
the navigation screen, the map screen is dis-
played. When Flap Setup screen is displayed
during the AV screen, the current AV operation
screen is displayed.
p If you can hear the LCD panel knocking
against your vehicle’s console or dash-
board, press o button to move the LCD
panel slightly forward.
p When adjusting the LCD panel angle, be
sure to press o or p button. Manually
adjusting the LCD panel by hand may da-
mage it.
%
Press OPEN/CLOSE button to close the
LCD panel.
p To open the LCD panel, press OPEN/CLOSE
button again.
Setting the LCD panel
Adjusting the LCD panel angle
1
Press and hold OPEN/CLOSE button.
Flap Setup screen appears.
p The adjusted the LCD panel angle will be
memorized and LCD panel will automati-
cally return to this angle the next time the
LCD panel is opened.
Setting the slide back function
2
Press o or p button to adjust the
You can adjust the LCD panel slide position to
prevent the display from hitting the shift lever
of an automatic vehicle when it is in P (park)
position.
LCD panel to an easily viewable angle.
The LCD panel angle continues changing as
long as you keep pressing and holding o or
p button.
p Please be careful, as LCD panel will slide
immediately after the setting is turned
[On].
32
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
Basic Operation
02
1
Press and hold OPEN/CLOSE button.
Removing the front panel
Flap Setup screen appears.
1
Press DETACH button to remove the
front panel.
2
Touch [Flap Set Back].
Touching [Flap Set Back] switches between
[On] and [Off].
2
Gently grip the right side of the front
panel and slowly pull it outward.
Take care not to drop the front panel and pro-
tect it from contact with water or other fluids
to prevent permanent damage.
Setting the automatic open
function
When you do not wish the display to open/
close automatically, you can set the automatic
open function to the manual mode.
1
Press and hold OPEN/CLOSE button.
Flap Setup screen appears.
2
Touch [Auto Flap].
Each touch of [Auto Flap] changes the set-
3
Put the front panel into provided pro-
tings as follows:
tective case for safe keeping.
!
!
Manual — You have to press OPEN/CLOSE
button to open/close the display
Auto — The display automatically opens/
closes when power to navigation system is
turned on
Attaching the front panel
%
Replace the front panel by holding it
upright to this product and clipping it se-
curely into the mounting hooks.
Protecting Your Product
from Theft
The front panel can be detached from the dis-
play unit to discourage theft, as described
below.
CAUTION
!
!
!
!
Never grip the display and the buttons tightly
or use force when removing or attaching.
Avoid subjecting the front panel to excessive
shocks.
Keep the front panel out of direct sunlight and
high temperatures.
After detaching the front panel, keep it in a
safe place so it is not scratched or damaged.
33
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
02
Basic Operation
About NAVI MENU and AV MENU
The methods for displaying NAVI MENU, used for navigation operations, and AV MENU, used for AV operations, are
different depending on which screen is currently displayed.
Map screen
NAVI MENU
Press
MAP button
Press
MENU button
Press AV button
Touch
Press AV button
Press
Touch
or VOLUME knob
[NAVI MENU]
or VOLUME knob
MAP button
[AV MENU]
Press
MENU button
AV operation screen
AV MENU
Basic Navigation
The most basic search function is Address
Search, in which the address is specified and
the destination searched. This section de-
scribes how to use Address Search and the
basics of using the navigation system.
CAUTION
For safety reasons, you cannot use some of these
basic navigation functions while your vehicle is in
motion. To enable these functions, you must stop
in a safe place and apply the parking brake (refer
34
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
Basic Operation
02
Basic flow of operation
How to set your destination by
address
1 Park your vehicle in a safe place, and apply
1
Press MAP button to display the map
the parking brake.
screen.
j
2 Insert the Pioneer DVD Map Disc to the
disc loading slot.
2
Press MENU button to display NAVI
MENU.
3
Touch [Destination] to display Destina-
j
3 Press MAP button to display the map
screen.
tion menu.
4
Touch [Address Search].
j
4 Press MENU button to display NAVI
MENU.
j
5 Touch [Destination] to display Destination
menu.
5
Touch [Zone code key].
j
6 Select the method of searching for your
destination.
If the destination is in another zone, this
changes the zone setting.
Zone code key
j
7 Enter the information about your destina-
tion.
j
8 Navigation system calculates the route to
your destination, and then shows the route
on the map.
j
6
Touch the zone code of the destination,
9 After releasing the parking brake, drive in
accordance with the navigation guidance,
subject to the important safety instructions
then touch [OK].
Selected zone
Zone code
35
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
02
Basic Operation
7
Input the house number and touch
City:
[OK].
Touch if you wish to first specify the destina-
tion city or area.
Touch the characters you wish to input.
:
The input text is deleted letter by letter from
the end of the text. Continuing to this will de-
lete all of the text.
Sym.:
You can input symbols such as “&” and “+”.
0-9:
:
You can input numbers.
The input text is deleted letter by letter from
the end of the text. Continuing to this will de-
lete all of the text.
Back:
Returns you to the previous screen.
p For example, for [Early California Ct], you
can just enter part of the name, such as
[California].
p When entering the characters, the unit will
automatically query the database for all
possible options. If there is only one letter
that could possibly follow your entry, that
letter will automatically be entered.
Back:
Returns you to the previous screen.
p You may also input a prefix to the house
number.
p If the house number you have input is not
found among subsequently selected
[Street] or [City] data, a message appears
saying that the address has not been found.
In that case, try inputting the house num-
ber again.
Searching your destination after specify-
ing the name of the city or area
p Touching [OK] with no input allows you to
specify and search for the name of the
street, city, or area first.
You can narrow down the search candidates
by initially specifying the name of the city or
area where your destination is located. Input-
ting the name of the city or area then selecting
the destination city or area from the list re-
turns you to the Street Name input screen.
Now input the street name, select the street
from the list.
8
Input the street name.
Touch the letter you wish to input. If the next
screen is not automatically displayed even
though the street name is entered, try touch-
ing [OK].
Inputted text
The number of applicable candidates
36
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
Basic Operation
02
In the selected area, if you touch [City] without
entering the name of the city or area, you can
set the cities or areas that you have searched
in the past from the list. (This function is not
available in the first time and when you have
selected an area that you have never searched
before.)
If you did not input the house number in Step
7, the house number input screen comes up
after the [Street] and [City] are determined.
You should now input the house number (per-
form Step 7).
p If there is more than one place for the
house number input, or if there is no such
house number in that place, a range of
house numbers are displayed. To start the
route calculation, touch the range within
the list you wish to specify as the destina-
tion.
9
Touch the street from the list.
p You can also see the destination on the
map by touching the
list.
to the right of the
= For details concerning operations, refer to
Scroll bar
Touching the or on the scroll bar scrolls
you through the list and allows you to view the
remaining items.
If an item cannot be displayed in a single line,
touching the to the right of the item allows
you to see the whole line.
p If you press MENU button, the calculation
is canceled.
p After the route calculation, the system start
storing the map data around the route for
“Memory navi mode”.
p When performing a destination search with
the route already set, select whether to re-
gard the specified area as your destination
and search for a new route, or search for a
route via that area.
!
Touching the
specifies the selected
street and streets intersecting it, allowing
you to set an intersection as your destina-
tion. This is useful when you don’t know the
house number of your destination or can-
not input the house number of the specified
street.
= For details concerning operations, refer to
p Once searched for, the location is automati-
cally stored in [Destination History].
= For details concerning operations, refer to
!
Touching the
you have selected. (Candidate place names
may appear in the list screen.)
displays a map of the place
= For details concerning operations, refer to
10 Drive in accordance with the screen
and voice information.
Your navigation system gives you the following
information with the timing adjusted to the
speed of your vehicle:
p If the selected street has only one matching
location, route calculation starts after
touching the item.
p A list appears if multiple options exist, se-
lect the desired one from the list, and pro-
ceed to the next step.
!
!
!
!
Distance to the next turning point
Direction of travel
Road number of the freeway
Way point (If this is set)
37
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
02
Basic Operation
!
Your destination
Memory navi mode
= If you want to search for another route,
refer to Recalculating the Route to Your Des-
= If you want to cancel the route guidance,
While the DVD Map Disc is inserted, you can
store the map data into the internal memory
of the navigation system. If the DVD Map Disc
is removed from the navigation system after
storing is completed, navigation is performed
using the data in the memory (memory navi
mode). When disappears, memory navi
mode is ready. You can now remove the DVD
Map Disc. In the memory navi mode, you can
play a music CD or DVD-Video on the naviga-
tion system while navigation is taking place.
The operation automatically switches to the
memory navi mode when the DVD Map Disc
is removed from the navigation system.
Some functions are restricted and different
from the navigation using the DVD Map Disc
(DVD navi mode). If you want to use these
functions, please insert the DVD Map Disc
again. During the memory navi mode, naviga-
tion is performed only using the data read into
the memory.
p Touching the
allows you to hear the
information again.
p To adjust the navigation volume, go to NAVI
MENU.
= For details concerning operations, refer to
p If you stop at a gas station or a restaurant
during the route guidance, your navigation
system remembers your destination and
route information. When you start the en-
gine and get back on the road, route gui-
dance resumes.
How to view the map screen
This section describes only the items that are
displayed on the map screen.
p You may need to insert the DVD Map Disc
and store new data in the memory during
navigation operation, such as when the
destination is far away. The memory navi
mode uses the following map data to per-
form navigation.
formation.
4
2
3
1
1 Current location
2 Distance to the destination
3 Estimated time of arrival (or travel time
to your destination)
4 Memory navi indicator
38
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
Basic Operation
02
p Touch [REAR SCREEN] to select the source
for Rear Display.
Basic AV Source
This section describes basic AV operations,
such as adjusting the volume, switching the
source and stopping the source, using CD op-
erations as an example.
p Touch [TRAFFIC] to switch to XM or SIRIUS
screen that memorized traffic channel.
p Sources that are not connected to the navi-
gation system, sources that are busy read-
ing a disc or magazine, and sources with
incomplete settings cannot be used.
p The term “external unit” refers to a Pioneer
product (such as one available in the fu-
ture) that, although incompatible as a
source, enables control of basic functions
by the navigation system. Two external units
can be controlled by the navigation system.
When two external units are connected, the
navigation system allocates them to exter-
nal unit 1 or external unit 2.
Selecting an AV source
1
Press VOLUME knob (or AV button) to
switch to the AV operation screen.
2
Press MENU button to change to AV
p When [Antenna Control] mode is set to
[Radio], the vehicle’s antenna can be
stowed or turned off by following the in-
structions below.
MENU.
3
Touch the source icon to select the de-
sired source in AV Source screen.
— Change the source from radio (AM or
FM) to another source.
— Turn the source off.
— Turn off the ignition switch (ACC OFF).
If [Antenna Control] mode is set to
[Power], the vehicle’s antenna can be
stowed or turned off only when the ACC is
set to “OFF”.
p Also, press VOLUME knob repeatedly when
the AV operation screen is displayed to
switch between sources:
Adjusting the volume
[DISC] (CD, ROM, DVD-V, DivX (built-in DVD
drive)) — [RADIO] (tuner) — [iPod] (iPod)
— [XM] (XM tuner) — [SIRIUS] — (SIRIUS
tuner) — [USB] (USB audio) — [BT-TEL]
(Bluetooth Telephone) — [BT-AUDIO]
(Bluetooth Audio) — [M-CD] (multi-CD
player) — [M-DVD] (multi-DVD player) —
[AV-1] (video input1) — [AV-2] (video
input2) — [EXT-1] (external unit 1) —
[EXT-2] (external unit 2) — [OFF] (source
off)
%
Use VOLUME knob to adjust the audio
sound level.
Rotate VOLUME knob to increase or decrease
the volume.
p To adjust the navigation volume (voice gui-
dance), access [Volume] in NAVI MENU.
= For details concerning operations, refer to
p Touch [OFF] to switch the source to OFF.
39
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
02
Basic Operation
3
Press VOLUME knob (or AV button) to
Turning the source off
switch DISC operation screen.
1
Press VOLUME knob (or AV button) to
switch to the AV operation screen.
2
Press MENU button to change to AV
MENU.
3
Touch [OFF] in AV Source screen.
p Press and hold VOLUME knob to switch
the source to mute.
Current track information
How to listen to a CD
You can listen to an audio CD by removing the
DVD Map Disc from the navigation system.
(For details, refer to page 158.)
1
Press EJECT button to remove the DVD
Map Disc.
4
Rotate VOLUME knob to adjust the vo-
lume.
5
Touch o or p to select a track you
want to listen to.
Information of the track being played
2
Insert the CD to the disc loading slot.
The audio CD set in the navigation system is
played.
You can also select a track by pressing o or
p button on the hardware.
6
To fast forward or rewind, keep touch-
ing o or p.
40
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
Basic Operation
02
You can also perform fast rewind/fast forward
by holding o or p button on the hard-
ware.
The function is not available during memory
navi mode. Or, the function is not available for
areas not stored on the disc.
Touching this button activates a message indi-
cating that the function is not available.
7
To hide the touch panel key, touch
[Hide].
Gray touch panel key with gray letters:
Information of the Audio source being played
The function is not available (e.g., operation is
prohibited while driving).
Distance to the guidance point
Current direction of travel
Next direction of travel
p If you touch the screen, the touch panel
keys are displayed again.
Available buttons
The availability of a specific button or function-
ality is indicated by its color. Depending on the
status of your vehicle, some buttons will be
available, while others will not be.
(e.g. [Address Search])
Black touch panel key:
The button is operable.
Gray touch panel key with white letters:
41
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
03
Navigation Menu and Map Display
This section describes the basic navigation op-
erations, including how to display NAVI
MENU and how to use Shortcut menu and
the map screen.
Info/Traffic menu
How to Use Menu Screens
There are two types of navigation menu: “NAVI
MENU” and “Shortcut menu”.
p The functions that cannot be used during
the memory navi mode are indicated in
gray with white letters. If you want to use
such functions, insert the DVD Map Disc.
Use this menu to check traffic information
mainly using the GEX-P10XMT*.
p [Traffic On Route], [Traffic Events], [Traf-
fic Flow], [Stock Info], [Set My Favorites],
and [My Favorites] can be used only when
the GEX-P10XMT* is connected to the navi-
gation system.
GEX-P10XMT*:
NAVI MENU
XM Digital Satellite Data & Audio Receiver
(sold separately). Traffic information only avail-
able for cities where information is provided
by XM NavTraffic service. Active subscription
to XM NavTraffic is required to receive traffic
information on the navigation system.
p [Traffic On Route], [Traffic Events], and
[Traffic Flow] can only be used in DVD navi
mode.
Use this menu for basic operation of your navi-
gation system.
1
With the map displayed, press MENU
button.
2
To change to the menu you want to
use, touch the name of the menu displayed
at the top of the screen.
NAVI MENU is divided into four submenus:
[Destination], [Info/Traffic], [Route Op-
tions], [Settings].
p Touch [AV MENU] changes to the AV opera-
tion screen.
Route Options menu
Destination menu
Used to specify the conditions for setting the
route to the destination.
= For details concerning operations, refer to
p [Edit Current Route], [View Current
Route] and [Recalculate] can be used
when the route is set.
Select the destination search method. The
route also can be canceled from this menu.
= About “Searching places to register”, refer
42
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
Navigation Menu and Map Display
03
: Destination*
Settings menu
Displayed when the map is scrolled. Set the
route to the place specified with the scroll cur-
sor.
: Change Route*
Displayed when the map is not scrolled. This
item can be selected only during route gui-
dance. You can add changes to your route and
check it.
Set the navigation functions so they can be
used easily.
= For details concerning operations, refer to
Chapter 6.
3
If you want to return to the map, press
MAP button.
Shortcut menu
Shortcuts allow you to perform various tasks,
such as route calculation for the location indi-
cated by the scroll cursor or registering a loca-
tion in Address Book, faster than using NAVI
MENU.
p The shortcuts displayed onscreen can be
changed. The shortcuts described here are
those that can be selected with the system
as default setting.
: Vicinity Search
Select a location with the scroll cursor. Nearby
POIs (Points Of Interest) will also be found.
: Registration
Registers the location indicated by the scroll
cursor to Address Book.
p Touching [Registration] and selecting
[Save] allows you to register the location to
Address Book.
= For details concerning operations, refer to
p Items marked with an asterisk (*) cannot
be removed from Shortcut menu.
%
When the map is displayed, briefly
touch any part of the map.
If you continue to touch the map, it will start
scrolling.
: Volume Setting
The sound volume for the navigation can be
set.
= For details concerning operations, refer to
: Menu Close
Hides Shortcut menu.
Shortcut menu
43
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
03
Navigation Menu and Map Display
How to view the map of the
current location
How to Use the Map
Most of the information provided by your navi-
gation system can be seen on the map. You
need to get to know how the information that
appears on the map.
Map View
Displays the standard map.
1
a
8
Switching the current position
screen display mode
There are four types of map display and two
additional view modes.
2
7
g
3
4
b
!
!
!
!
!
!
Map View
Driver’s View
5
c
9
h 6
Guide View (during route guidance only)
Route View (during route guidance only)
Vehicle Dynamics
Rear View (Only possible when [Camera]
is set to [On])
Driver’s View
Displays the map from the driver’s viewpoint.
1
a
8
p If you deviate from the route when the view
mode is Route View or Guide View and
enter a street not recorded on the disc, the
screen changes to Map View. When you
return to the route, the screen returns to
the original view and resumes route gui-
dance.
2
f
7
g
9
4
b
3
5
h 6
c
1
Press MAP button to display a map of
the area around your current position.
CAUTION
2
3
Press MAP button again.
In Driver’s View, a small gauge with no scale is
depicted, but is not intended to be used as a
speedometer. Use the actual speedometer of your
vehicle to confirm speed.
Touch the mode name or press MAP
button to select the mode you want to dis-
play.
p If the mode is selected by pressing MAP
button, the screen automatically switches
to the selected map display mode after 4
seconds.
44
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
Navigation Menu and Map Display
03
Guide View
Overlays two arrows onto the standard map
(“Map View”).
Rear View
1
a
8
Rear view image is displayed on the left-hand
side of the screen, while the map of your sur-
roundings is indicated on the right.
2
f
7
g
f
4
b
5
c
9
h 6
3
Route View
p If you touch the screen briefly, the screen
changes Map View with Shortcut menu.
If you close Shortcut menu the screen re-
turns to Rear View.
p If [Camera] is set to [Off], the rear view
image is not displayed. Please set it to
[On].
= For details concerning operations, refer to
p When using a camera set to turn ON/OFF
in conjunction with the reverse signal, no
camera images will be displayed in rear
view mode while you are moving forward.
p To use “Rear View”, the camera must be
set to always remain on. In that case, you
should ask the camera maker or dealer
whether the camera’s functions or longev-
ity would be affected.
Displays the name of the street you will travel
along next and an arrow indicating the direc-
tion of travel.
1
a
8
2
f
7
g
d
4
b
3
6
h
5
9
c
Vehicle Dynamics Display
Indicates the status of your vehicle.
p Rear View can be displayed at all times
(e.g. when monitoring an attached trailer)
as a split screen where map information is
partially displayed. Please beware that in
this setting, camera image is not resized to
fit to screen, and that a portion of camera
image may not be viewable.
CAUTION
In Vehicle Dynamics Display mode, the speed-
ometer display may show a different speed than
your vehicle’s actual speedometer, because your
unit measures speed in a different way.
p You can change the items indicated on the
left and right meters.
45
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
03
Navigation Menu and Map Display
Enlarged map of the intersection
When [Close-up of Junction] in Settings
menu is [On], an enlarged map of the junction
appears. When driving on a freeway, a special
guide illustration is displayed.
Display items
Guidance point*
The next guidance point (next turning point,
etc.) is shown by a yellow flag.
Destination*
A checker-flag indicates your destination.
1 Name of the next street to be used (or
next guidance point)*
2 Distance to the guidance point*
Touch to access the next information.
e
d
3 Current location
p The system cannot be changed to an en-
larged intersection map in the following
mode:
The current location of your vehicle. The tip
of the triangular mark indicates your head-
ing and the display moves automatically as
you drive.
— Driver’s View
— Vehicle Dynamics
4 Distance to the destination (or distance
to way point)*
Display during freeway driving
In certain locations of the freeway, lane infor-
mation is available, indicating the recom-
mended lane to be in to easily maneuver the
next guidance.
If way points are set, the display changes
with each touch. When two or more way
points are set, the distance to the destina-
tion and the distance to the next way point
are switched.
i
5 Name of the street your vehicle is tra-
veling along (or City Name, etc.)
6 Compass
The red arrow indicates north. If the scale is
less than 25 miles (50 km), touching the
map changes the direction that it is dis-
played in (north up/ heading up). When the
scale of the map is greater than 25 miles
(50 km), it is fixed to “North up”.
While driving on the freeway, freeway exit
numbers and freeway signs may be displayed
when in the vicinity of interchanges and exits.
!
Heading up:
The map display always shows the vehi-
cle’s direction as proceeding toward the
top of the screen.
j
k
!
North up:
The map display always has north at the
top of the screen.
7 Zoom in/Zoom out
Touch to change the map’s scale.
46
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
Navigation Menu and Map Display
03
g Direction line*
The direction towards your destination (or
scroll cursor) is indicated with a straight
line.
8 Map scale
The scale of the map is indicated by dis-
tance.
h Memory navi indicator
9 TRAFFIC icon
i Lane information*
This appears when an XM tuner (GEX-
P10XMT, sold separately) is connected, and
traffic information is received.
Lane information is displayed the first time
there is a voice guidance on your route.
When the guidance screen is displayed
near an interchange or exit, the lane infor-
mation disappears.
a Current time
b Estimated time of arrival (or travel time
to your destination)*
The display alternates by touching it.
The estimated time of arrival is automati-
cally calculated from Average Speed set
and the actual average speed.
j Freeway signs*
These show the road number and give direc-
tional information.
k Freeway exit information*
Displays the freeway exit.
= For details concerning operations, refer
p Information with the mark (*) appears only
when the route is set.
p Depending on the conditions and settings,
some items may not be displayed.
c Tracking mark
The tracking mark shows the route your ve-
hicle has traveled with dots.
Changing the scale of the map
Touching or allows you to change the
map scale. Touch and holding or allows
you to change the scale in smaller step within
a range of 25 yards to 1 000 miles (25 meters
to 2 000 kilometers). When the view mode is
set to Map View or Guide View, “Direct scale
key” is displayed. Touching “Direct scale key”
changes the map to the selected scale di-
rectly.
d Map of your surroundings (Side map)
Touching the map briefly shows Shortcut
menu, while touching longer changes the
map to Scroll mode.
e Distance to a turning point*
Displayed on the enlarged intersection map.
The green bar gets shorter as your vehicle
approaches a turning point.
f Next direction of travel*
When you approach a guidance point, it ap-
pears green.
47
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
03
Navigation Menu and Map Display
p In memory navi mode and/or when traver-
sing an area not stored on the disc, selec-
tion of the scales is limited.
3
1
2
5
4
1 Scroll location
Direct scale key
The position of the scroll cursor shows the
location selected on the current map.
p When the scale is 0.25 mile (200 m) or
lower, the road appears light blue in the
vicinity of the scroll cursor.
p The icon of a registered location and the
traffic information icons are displayed
when the map scale is 10 miles (20 km) or
lower.
p POI icons and the line for traffic congestion
and traffic flow are displayed when the
map scale is 0.75 mile (1 km) or lower.
2 Direction line
The direction towards the scroll cursor is in-
dicated with a straight line.
3 Distance from the current location
The distance in a straight line between the
location indicated by the scroll cursor and
your current location.
Moving the map to the location
you want to see
If you touch the display briefly, Shortcut
menu appears.
Touching anywhere on the map for at least
2 seconds changes the map to Scroll mode
and the map begins scrolling in the direction
you touched. The scrolling stops when you re-
lease your finger from the screen. At this time,
the scroll cursor appears at the center of the
screen. Also a line connecting between the
current location and scroll cursor appears.
Pressing MAP button returns you to the map
of your surroundings.
4 The street name, city name, area name
and other information for this location.
(The displayed information varies according
to the scale.)
Touching the on the right displays hidden
text.
5 Shortcut menu
Viewing the information of a
specified location
An icon appears at registered places (home lo-
cation, specific places, Address Book entries)
and places where there is a POI icon or traffic
information icon. Place the scroll cursor over
the icon to view detailed information.
p Touch the area close to the center of the
screen to scroll slowly. Touch near the
sides of the screen to scroll quickly.
1
Scroll the map and move the scroll cur-
sor to the icon you want to view.
48
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
Navigation Menu and Map Display
03
2
Touch
.
When appears to the right of the list
You can also set a destination by touching
to the right of the destination list such as Ad-
dress Book. Touch [OK] to confirm. The loca-
tion indicated by the scroll cursor will be set
as a destination.
Information for a specified location appears.
The displayed information varies according to
the location. (There may be no information for
that location.)
Scroll:
The map display changes to Shortcut menu.
If you touch anywhere on the map, the map
display changes to Scroll mode.
3
Touch [Back].
You are returned to the previous display.
p In the memory navi mode, you can only see
detailed information for registered points
(when available).
Finding a destination on the map
If you search the location you want to visit by
scrolling the map, touch
in Shortcut
menu to specify your destination on the map.
1
Press MAP button to access the map
screen.
2
Touch the map for at least 2 seconds.
The map display changes to Scroll mode.
3
Scroll the map and move the scroll cur-
sor to the place you want to make your
destination.
4
Touch
.
49
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
04
Setting a Route to Your Destination
3
Touch [Category].
CAUTION
For safety reasons, these route-setting functions
Category
are not available while your vehicle is in motion.
To enable these functions, you must stop in a
safe place and put on the parking brake before
setting your route (refer to Parking brake interlock
p Some information on traffic regulations de-
pends on the time when the route calcula-
Name:
tion is performed. Thus, the information
may not correspond with a certain traffic
regulation when your vehicle actually
passes the location. Also, the information
on the traffic regulations provided will be
for a passenger vehicle, and not for a truck
or other delivery vehicles. Always follow the
actual traffic regulations when driving.
p If you press MENU button during route cal-
culation, the calculation is canceled and
the map display appears.
Touch if you wish to first specify the POI
Name.
City:
Touch if you wish to first specify the destina-
tion city or area.
4
Touch the desired category.
p Inserting the DVD Map Disc will cause a
forced reroute. (This rerouting cannot be
canceled.)
If the category is not sub-divided into more de-
tailed categories, the list will not be displayed.
Proceed to Step 6.
Finding Your Destination by
Selecting the Type of Facility
5
Touch the subcategory.
Information about various facilities (Points Of
Interest - POI), such as gas stations, amuse-
ment parks or restaurants, is available. By se-
lecting the category (or entering the POI
Name), you can search for a POI.
6
Input the name of the POI.
If the list does not automatically appear when
the name of the POI has been entered, try
touching [OK].
City:
Touch to specify the destination city or area.
p If less than six POIs in a subcategory are
available, the screen for inputting the POI
name is skipped.
Searching for Points of Interest
(POI)
1
Touch [Destination] in NAVI MENU, and
then touch [POI Search].
7
Touch POI for your destination.
p Touching displays a map of the sur-
roundings of the selected POI.
= For details concerning operations, refer to
2
Touch the zone code key of the destina-
tion and touch [OK].
50
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
Setting a Route to Your Destination
04
3
Touch [OK].
Finding a POI in your surroundings
Names of POIs and their distance from your
current location appear. They are listed in
order from nearest to farthest.
You can search for Points Of Interest in your
surroundings on the map. Use it to find a POI
to visit during a journey.
1
Touch [Destination] in NAVI MENU, and
then touch [Vicinity Search].
2
Touch the desired category.
Category
Distance to the facility
p When you touch , the POIs around the
specified location are shown on a map.
= For details concerning operations, refer to
The selected category will have a red check
mark.
p Searching range is approximately 10 miles
(16 km) square from the current location.
OK:
Starts searching.
Searching the facilities around
the scroll cursor
Back:
Returns to the previous screen.
1
Scroll the map and move the scroll cur-
Set:
sor to the place where you want to search
for POI.
Display the screen for registering POI short-
cuts.
2
Touch
.
p If you touch one of the POI shortcuts (e.g.
), you can start searching POI directly for
the selected category on the POI shortcut.
p If you want to search for facilities by using
both marked category and POI shortcuts,
select some categories in the list and then
touch the POI shortcut to start searching.
p If you want to search with more detailed ca-
tegories, touch . When the subcategory
list appears, touch the item and touch
[Back]. When only a few types of the de-
tailed categories are selected, blue check
marks will appear.
p This can be used when setting Vicinity
Search icon to display as a shortcut on the
map screen.
= For details concerning operations, refer to
p The distance indicated in the search result
is the distance from the scroll cursor to the
facility.
p The bottom icons are for shortcuts to your
favorite categories. Touching a shortcut
icon displays a list of the facilities in the ca-
tegory.
p You can select from the detailed category
for up to 100 items.
51
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
04
Setting a Route to Your Destination
p [Vicinity Search] in NAVI MENU searches
1
Touch [Destination] in the NAVI MENU,
your surroundings. On the other hand,
and then touch [Telephone Search].
when using
will be searched.
in Shortcut menu ( d
2
Input a telephone number.
p If there is more than one place for the num-
ber input, a list of those places is displayed.
Touch the item you want in the list.
Setting an Entrance or Exit of
a Freeway as Your Destination
You can set the entrance or exit of a freeway
as your destination.
3
If the displayed place is satisfactory,
touch [OK].
Touching [Scroll] changes the destination.
1
Touch [Destination] in NAVI MENU, and
then touch [Freeway Search].
Route Calculation to Your
Home Location or to Your
Favorite Location
If your home location is registered, the route
home can be calculated by a single touch of
the touch key from Destination menu. Also,
you can register one location, such as your
workplace, as your favorite location, and the
route is calculated in a similar way.
2
Touch the zone code key of the destina-
tion and touch [OK].
3
Enter the name of the freeway and
touch [OK].
4
Touch the freeway.
The display for selecting your destination to
the entrance or to the exit of the freeway ap-
pears.
%
Touch [Destination] in NAVI MENU, and
5
Touch [Entrance] or [Exit].
then touch [Return Home] or [Go to].
The list of entrances to, or exits from, the se-
lected freeway appears.
6
Touch your destination.
p You can also see the destination by touch-
ing the
on the right of the list.
Selecting Destination from
“Destination History” and
“Address Book”
= For details concerning operations, refer to
Any place that has been searched before is
stored in [Destination History]. Places that
you have registered manually, such as your
home, are stored in [Address Book]. Simply
select the place you want to go to from the list
and a route to that place will be calculated.
= For information on Address Book, refer to
Chapter 5.
Searching for Your
Destination by Specifying
the Telephone Number
If you know the telephone number of your des-
tination, you can quickly search for your desti-
nation by specifying the telephone number.
= For information on Destination History,
refer to Chapter 5.
52
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
Setting a Route to Your Destination
04
1
Touch [Destination] in NAVI MENU, and
No:
then touch [Address Book] or [Destination
History].
Returns to the previous display without delet-
ing the route.
p You can also cancel the route using
2
Touch your destination name.
Change Route in Shortcut menu.
Checking the Set Route
You can check information about the route be-
tween your current location and your destina-
tion.
You can select from the following methods:
checking the shape of the route by scrolling
the map along the route, checking the passing
streets with a list, and checking the entire dis-
tance of the route in a single screen.
Route calculation starts.
p You can also see the destination by touch-
ing
on the right of the list.
= For details concerning operations, refer to
Checking the set route with the
map
Canceling the Route Guidance
1
Touch [Route Options] in NAVI MENU,
If you no longer need to travel to your destina-
tion or if you want to change your destination,
follow the steps below to cancel the route gui-
dance.
then touch [View Current Route].
p [View Current Route] is active only when
the route is set.
p You can also see the location by touching
the
on the right of the list.
1
Touch [Destination] in NAVI MENU,
then touch [Cancel Route].
2
Touch [Scroll].
The message confirming whether to cancel
the current route appears.
The screen for selecting the point to start
scrolling appears.
2
Touch [Yes (all)].
3
Touch the point to start scrolling.
1
3
2
The current route is deleted, and a map of
your surroundings reappears.
You can select the following items:
1 Starting Point
Yes (one):
Route is recalculated by canceling the se-
lected way point.
2 Way Point (If this is set)
3 Destination
53
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
04
Setting a Route to Your Destination
p If there are multiple way points, selecting
[Way Point] displays a list of the way points
on the route. Touch the place you want to
start scrolling from.
Name of the streets you are driving through
4
Touch
To continue scrolling after you release your fin-
ger, touch and hold or . If neces-
or
to scroll the map.
sary, the scale of the map can be changed.
Driving distance
Current Route
4
Touch [Back].
You can return to the previous display.
p When a long distance route is calculated,
your navigation system may not be able to
list all the roads. (In this case, the remain-
ing roads will be shown in the list as you
drive on.)
Scroll Cursor
Map:
Checking the entire route overview
You can check the entire shape of the current
route.
p When [View Current Route] is selected
during the memory navi mode, the informa-
tion is displayed up to the location where
the route is in memory.
The scroll screen is displayed.
= For details concerning operations, refer to
5
Touch [Back].
You can return to the previous display.
1
Touch [Route Options] in NAVI MENU,
then touch [View Current Route].
p [View Current Route] is active only when
the route is set.
p You can also see the location by touching
on the right of the list.
Checking the set route by text
This function is not available if your vehicle
has deviated from the set route.
p When [Profile] is selected during the mem-
ory navi mode, information is displayed up
to the location where the route is stored in
memory.
2
Touch [Overview].
A map of the whole route up to the destination
is displayed.
p You can also check the overview by using
Shortcut menu if [Whole Route Over-
view] is selected on [Short-Cut Selection].
1
Touch [Route Options] in NAVI MENU,
then touch [View Current Route].
p [View Current Route] is active only when
the route is set.
p You can also see the location by touching
on the right of the list.
Checking the set route from
Shortcut menu
You can also check the information about the
set route from Shortcut menu.
2
3
Touch [Profile].
Check the contents on the display.
Scroll the list as necessary.
54
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
Setting a Route to Your Destination
04
1
Touch the map screen.
3
Touch the distance from the list.
Shortcut menu appears.
2
3
Touch
.
Touch [Route Profile] or [Route Scroll].
Detour distance
Searches detours for a specified distance in
the route ahead of your current position. After
the route is calculated, the map screen shows
your surroundings and route guidance is re-
sumed.
4
Touch [Back].
You can return to the previous display.
Recalculating the Route to
Your Destination
You can set the length of the area, avoid just a
certain area, or you can even search a new
route from the current location to your desti-
nation.
Editing Way Points to the
Current Route
You can select way points (locations you want
to visit on the way to your destination) and you
can recalculate the route to pass through
these locations.
Recalculating the route
%
Touch [Route Options] in NAVI MENU,
and then touch [Recalculate].
This option automatically searches the route
to the destination again.
Editing a way point
Up to 5 way points can be selected, and se-
lected points can be sorted automatically or
manually.
p [Edit Current Route] is active only when
the route is set.
p [Recalculate] is active only when the route
is set.
p You can also recalculate (Reroute) your
route using
Change Route in Shortcut
menu.
1
Touch [Route Options] in NAVI MENU,
and then touch [Edit Current Route].
Recalculating a specified
distance in the route ahead of
your current position
2
Select editing method.
1
Touch the map screen.
Shortcut menu appears.
2
Touch
.
p You can also see the location by touching
on the right of the list.
55
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
04
Setting a Route to Your Destination
Add:
2
3
Touch
.
Switch the display to search for points. After
searching for a point, display it on a map, then
touch [OK] to add to the way points. (You can
add up to 5 way points in total.)
Touch [Skip Way Point].
A message asking whether you want to skip
the next way point appears.
Delete:
4
Touch [Yes].
You can delete way points from the list. (You
can delete way points successively.)
A new route to your destination through all the
remaining way points, except for the skipped
way point, is calculated.
Sort:
Touch to display a screen listing the way
points. Touching
or
on the left of the list
allows you to sort the way points manually.
Setting Areas to Avoid
If you register Designate Areas to Avoid,
such as crowded intersections or congested
areas, routes can be calculated that avoid
those areas.
Registering an area to avoid
Automatic:
This section describes how to register an Area
to Avoid for the first time. You can register up
to five Areas to Avoid.
You can sort the destination and way points
automatically. The system will show the near-
est way point (distance in a straight line) from
the current location as way point 1, and sort
the other points (including your destination) in
order of distance from your current location.
1
Touch [Route Options] in NAVI MENU,
then touch [Designate Areas to Avoid].
2
3
Touch [Yes].
Original:
Select one of the items shown in [New
Returns to the original order.
Select from manual order, [Automatic] or
[Original] and touch [Done] to start the route
search.
Area].
When registering for the first time, any item
on the list is shown as [New Area].
3
Touch [Done].
p If you set a way point(s) in the route to your
destination, the route up to the next way
point will appear light green. The rest of the
route will be light blue.
Skipping a way point
4
Select the place to register and display
If the points are set, the next way point along
the route can be skipped.
the map.
= About “Searching places to register”, refer
Once a search is complete, a map with the
specified location at its center appears.
1
Touch the map screen.
Shortcut menu appears.
56
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
Setting a Route to Your Destination
04
p If you select [Map Search], move the scroll
cursor to the place you want to set and
touch [OK].
3
Select the desired operation.
5
Change the map scale and decide the
size of the Area to Avoid.
The Area to avoid is enclosed in a red frame.
You can also change the map scale though
the maximum map scale for registering Areas
to Avoid is 0.1 mile (100 m).
Rename:
Changes the name. Enter the new name and
touch [OK]. This returns you to Route Op-
tions menu.
6
Scroll the map, adjust the position of
the red frame, and touch [OK].
Change:
A specified area can be changed. For the next
steps, refer to Step 3 in Registering an area to
Delete:
Delete the selected Area to Avoid.
If you want to stop registration, touch [Back].
p Depending on the setting of route search
conditions, you may not be able to avoid
the specified areas. A confirmation mes-
sage is displayed on the screen at this time.
Displaying Certain POI on
the Map
POI in a certain category can be shown on the
map, and you can check the location on the
display.
1
Touch [Info/Traffic] in NAVI MENU, then
Changing or deleting an area to
avoid
You can subsequently change/rename/delete
an Area to Avoid.
touch [Overlay POI].
2
play.
Touch the category you want to dis-
The selected item is marked. If you want to se-
lect other categories, repeat this step.
p If you want to display more detailed cate-
gories, touch . When the subcategory list
appears, touch the item you want to display
and touch [Back].
1
Touch [Route Options] in NAVI MENU,
then touch [Designate Areas to Avoid].
2
Select the area you want to change or
delete.
p When some sub-categories are selected,
the corresponding category is marked blue.
When all the sub-categories within a cate-
gory are selected, that category is marked
red.
p You can use up to 100 categories of the de-
tailed categories for [Overlay POI].
57
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
04
Setting a Route to Your Destination
p If you touch one of the POI shortcuts (e.g.
), you can start searching for POI directly
in the selected category on the POI short-
cut.
4
Touch category or
.
3
Press MAP button.
POI’s in the selected category appear on the
map.
p You can also display POI by using Shortcut
menu if [Overlay POI] is selected on
[Short-Cut Selection].
Touching a category adds that category to the
shortcuts.
5
Touch subcategory.
The selected category is added to the list of
POI.
When registering another icon, repeat step 3
through step 5.
p You can register a POI shortcut by touching
[Overlay POI] under [Info/Traffic] in NAVI
MENU, or by touching the icons such as
and in Shortcut menu. The steps for
registration are the same as described
above.
Registering/deleting POI
Shortcuts
You can register up to six shortcuts to your fa-
vorite POI. You can also change or delete the
registered shortcuts.
Registering a POI shortcut
1
Touch [Destination] in NAVI MENU, and
then touch [Vicinity Search].
Deleting a POI shortcut
2
Touch [Set].
1
Touch [Destination] in NAVI MENU, and
then touch [Vicinity Search].
p You can also touch
in Shortcut menu or
[Info/Traffic] in NAVI MENU, then touch
[Overlay POI].
2
3
Touch [Set].
Touch [Delete].
Displays a list of already registered POI short-
cuts.
Displays a list of already registered POI short-
cuts.
3
Touch [Add].
4
Touch the category to be deleted.
A red check appears on the selected shortcut.
All:
A red check will appear on all registered cate-
gories.
5
Touch [Delete].
Deletes the selected shortcut from the list.
Displays a POI category list.
58
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
Setting a Route to Your Destination
04
Recalculate
Automatically searches the route to the desti-
nation again.
Modifying the Route
Calculation Conditions
You can change the route calculation condi-
tions using Route Options menu. The follow-
ing description features an example of
changing the number of routes to be
searched.
p [Recalculate] is displayed only when the
route is set.
Number of Routes
This setting controls whether the system
should calculate only one route, or several
routes.
1
Touch [Route Options] in NAVI MENU.
2
Touch [Number of Routes].
1*:
The current settings appear under the name of
the item. Each time you touch the item, the
setting changes. Repeatedly touch the item
until the value you want to set appears.
Only one route judged as being optimum by
your navigation system is calculated.
Multiple:
Several route options are calculated (maxi-
mum 6 routes).
Route Condition
This setting controls whether the route should
be calculated by taking into account the time
or the distance.
Fast*:
Calculate a route with the shortest travel time
to your destination as a priority.
Items that users can operate
This section describes the details of the each
item. Settings marked with an asterisk (*)
show that they are default or factory settings.
Short:
Calculate a route with the shortest distance to
your destination as a priority.
Edit Current Route
Avoid Freeway
This displays a screen for adding or deleting
way points. The method is the same as de-
p [Edit Current Route] is displayed only
when the route is set.
This setting controls whether freeways may be
included in the road calculation. (A route
using a freeway may be calculated in some
cases, such as when setting your destination
far away.)
On:
Calculate a route that avoids freeways.
Off*:
View Current Route
Calculate a route that may include freeways.
Avoid Ferry
This setting controls whether ferry crossings
should be taken into account.
On:
Calculate a route that avoids ferries.
Off*:
59
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
04
Setting a Route to Your Destination
Calculate a route that may include ferries.
p The system may calculate a route that in-
cludes ferries even if [On] is selected.
3
Touch [Next] to change the displayed
route.
Avoid Toll Road
This setting controls whether toll roads (in-
cluding toll areas) should be taken into ac-
count.
On:
Calculate a route that avoids toll roads (includ-
ing toll areas).
1
3
2
The following information is displayed on this
screen:
Off*:
Calculate a route that may include toll roads
(including toll areas).
p The system may calculate a route that in-
cludes toll roads even if [On] is selected.
1 Route calculation condition
Displays the conditions set by Route Op-
tions menu by icon.
!
!
!
Use/avoid freeway
Use/avoid toll road
Use/avoid ferry
Designate Areas to Avoid
Displays the inability to fulfill the conditions
by icon.
Perform the route calculation
for several route options, and
select one
You can get route calculations for several
route options. After route options are calcu-
lated, select the one you want.
!
!
Pass through Area to Avoid
Use toll road although the setting
[Avoid Toll Road] is [On].
Use Ferry although the setting [Avoid
Ferry] is [On].
!
2 Distance to your destination
3 Travel time to your destination
p [Avoid Freeway] setting may not be re-
flected, depending on the distance to the
destination.
p You can see other places while displaying a
possible route by scrolling the map.
Touching [Next] moves the next candidate
route to the center and indicates the map.
1
Set [Number of Routes] to [Multiple].
2
Search your destination and set the
route.
Calculated routes are shown in different colors
(from two to six routes).
4
Touch [Information] to check the infor-
mation on the selected route.
You can also check details of the roads along
the selected route. (If you touch [Back], you
can return to the previous display.)
60
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
Setting a Route to Your Destination
04
p After the route is calculated, it may take
some time until the detailed route informa-
tion (Route Profile) is displayed.
5
Touch [OK].
The route you selected is accepted, and the
map of your surroundings appears. When you
start driving, the route guidance begins.
p If the above operations are not performed
within 30 seconds after the route calcula-
tion is completed and you have already
started your vehicle, the route selected at
the time is automatically chosen.
61
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
05
Editing the Navigation Utilities
CAUTION
For safety reasons, you cannot use some of these
navigation functions while your vehicle is in mo-
tion. To enable these functions, you must stop in
a safe place and apply the parking brake (refer to
p The items already registered under [Return
Home] or [Go to] can be modified.
Editing Registered Locations
3
Search for a location to register.
Address Book can store up to 300 registered
locations. These can include home location,
favorite places and destinations you have al-
ready registered. This registered location infor-
mation can also be modified. Also, routes to
registered locations can be calculated by
touching the screen. Registering places you
visit frequently saves time and effort.
You can select a method of location search on
the display.
= For more details about “Address Search”,
= About “Searching places to register”, refer
p If you select [Map Search], move the scroll
cursor to the location you want to set and
touch [OK].
p Address Book is automatically updated in
alphabetic order. However, [Return Home]
and [Go to] always appear at the top.
4
Point the scroll cursor to the location
you want to register and touch [OK].
Registering your home and
your favorite location
5
Touch [Save].
Completes the registration.
Of 300 registered locations that can be stored,
home location and favorite locations can be
stored separately in Address Book. Register-
ing your favorite location for the first time is
described here. You can change the registered
information later. You might find it useful to
register your workplace or a relative’s home as
your favorite location.
Registering a previous location
in Address Book
Once a destination or way point is searched, it
is automatically retained and stored in Desti-
nation History. If a search is canceled while
still in progress, only the places where the
map was displayed and scrolled through or
places where Shortcut menu was displayed
are retained and stored. Note that after 100
places are stored, new places are automati-
cally overwritten on top of old ones, in order
from oldest to most recent. Therefore, to en-
sure that certain places are kept and not over-
written, be sure to register them in Address
Book.
Map icons:
:
Home location icon
:
Favorite location icon
1
Touch [Settings] in NAVI MENU, then
touch [Defined Locations].
1
Touch [Destination] in NAVI MENU,
2
Touch [Set ”Go To”].
then touch [Destination History].
When registering your home location, touch
[Set ”Home”].
62
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
Editing the Navigation Utilities
05
= For details concerning operations, refer to
2
Touch on the right-hand side of the
place you want to register in Address
Book.
Add:
The screen for selecting the method for regis-
tering the location in Address Book appears.
= For more details about “Address Search”,
= About “Searching places to register”, refer
p If you select [Map Search], move the scroll
cursor to the place you want to set and
touch [OK].
:
The map of that place can be displayed.
= For details concerning operations, refer to
3
Touch [Edit Information].
3
4
Touch [Registration].
Touch [Save].
Registration is now complete.
p If you want to stop registration, touch
[Back].
The Address Information menu appears. Refer
to the item corresponding to the subsequent
operation. After finishing the operation, Ad-
dress Book menu appears. You can continue
to edit other information items if necessary.
Editing a location’s information
In Address Book menu, touching on the
right-hand side of the place displays Address
Book Operate menu.
1
2
3
4
5
6
To edit the information about the location:
1
Touch [Destination] in NAVI MENU,
then touch [Address Book].
2
Touch on the right-hand side of the
1 Name
place whose information you want to edit.
You can enter the desired name.
2 Name (2nd line)
The name of the city appears in this column
(Not editable).
3 Phone number
You can search by registered telephone
number.
:
4 Pictograph
The map of that place can be displayed.
The symbol displayed on the map.
63
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
05
Editing the Navigation Utilities
5 Sound
2
Select the sound.
The selected operating sound is played.
6 Modify Location
The Address Information menu appears.
p If you want to hear the operating sound,
You can change the registered location by
scrolling the map.
touch
.
Modify the location
4
Touch [Save].
Completes the registration.
Changing a name
1
Touch [Edit Name].
Deleting Address Book or
Destination History information
Items registered in Address Book or Destina-
tion History can be deleted. All entries of the
data in Address Book or Destination History
can be deleted at once.
2
Enter a new name; touch [OK].
The name of the current location appears in
the text box. Delete the current name, and
enter a new name between 1 and 23 charac-
ters long.
3
Touch [Save].
1
Touch [Destination] in NAVI MENU,
The details you set are registered.
then touch [Address Book].
To delete items in Destination History, touch
[Destination History].
p You cannot change the name of your home.
Entering or changing a phone number
2
Touch on the right-hand side of the
1
Touch [Edit Phone Number].
place you want to delete.
2
Input a phone number and touch [OK].
3
Select the deletion method.
The Address Information menu appears.
p To change a registered phone number, de-
lete the existing number and then enter a
new one.
Selecting a pictograph to appear on
the map
1
Touch [Select Image].
Delete This Item:
Delete the location selected.
2
Touch the Pictograph to appear on the
Delete All Address Book Entries (or Delete
All Destinations):
Delete all Address Book or Destination His-
tory data.
map.
The Address Information menu appears.
p You cannot change the mark of your home
and your favorite location.
4
Select [Yes].
Selecting sound
The data you selected is deleted.
Alternative option:
1
Touch [Select Sound].
No:
The display shown in Step 3 appears.
64
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
Editing the Navigation Utilities
05
p Because deleted data cannot be restored,
take extra care not to select [Delete All Ad-
dress Book Entries] and [Delete All Desti-
nations] by mistake.
computer. Then use the personal computer
to store POINT folder in the first level of a
CD-R/-RW and DVD-R/-RW.
1
2
Insert a disc to the disc loading slot.
Touch [Settings] in NAVI MENU, then
touch [System Options].
Changing the position of locations
registered in Address Book
You can select a location registered in Ad-
dress Book, display a map of its surroundings
and change its position.
3
Touch [Read from Disc].
The list of groups appears.
4
Touch the desired group.
1
In Address Book menu, touch on the
5
Touch the desired locations.
right-hand side of the place whose position
you want to change.
Selected locations are marked. To load the
data from other locations, repeat this step.
Alternative option:
2
Touch [Edit Information], and then
touch [Modify Location].
The map of the selected area and its surround-
ings appears.
All:
All the locations are selected (or canceled) at
once.
3
Touch the display to change its posi-
6
Touch [OK].
tion, then touch [OK].
The data of the selected locations is stored in
Address Book.
4
Touch [Save].
The position is changed.
Loading registered locations
data from a Disc
Address Book data stored on a CD-R/-RW
and DVD-R/-RW can be loaded to the naviga-
tion system.
This function is used when moving Address
Book data from a Pioneer navigation system
with a PC card slot (e.g., AVIC-900DVD) to a
Pioneer navigation system without a PC card
slot.
p When moving data, copy the folder named
“POINT” from the PC card to a personal
65
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
05
Editing the Navigation Utilities
2
Touch or to view the incident list.
Using XM NavTraffic
Information
Places (street names) where incidents have
occurred are displayed in the list.
If you have a GEX-P10XMT XM Digital Satellite
Data & Audio Receiver (sold separately) at-
tached to the navigation system, and have an
active subscription to XM NavTraffic service,
you can view current traffic conditions and in-
formation on your navigation display. When
the unit receives updated traffic information,
the navigation system will overlay the traffic in-
formation on your map, and also display de-
tailed text information when available. When
you are traveling along a route and there is
traffic information on your current route, the
system will automatically detect it, and ask
you if you would like to be rerouted. (In such
case, route calculation takes into considera-
tion about 90 mile radius of alternative routes
and its traffic conditions from your current lo-
cation).
1
2
4
5
3
1 Street or place name
2 Direction
3 Incident
4 Distance to the location
5 The incident numbers currently dis-
played and the total number of inci-
dents
p The incidents that have already been read
will be displayed in letters with a white out-
line. Unread incidents will be in white.
p The term “traffic congestion” in this section
indicated the following types of traffic infor-
mation: stop and go, stopped traffic and
closed/ blocked roads. This information is
always taken into consideration when
p Touching
allows you to check the place
on a map. (Traffic information without posi-
tional information cannot be checked on a
map.)
checking your route, and the information
related with these events cannot be turned
off. Additionally, the system also takes into
consideration the traffic flow information if
[Use traffic flow information] is [On].
:
You can sort the traffic information in alphabe-
tical order.
:
You can sort the traffic information according
to the incident.
Viewing traffic list
:
Traffic Information is displayed onscreen in a
list. This allows you to check how many traffic
incidents have occurred, their location and
their distance from your current position.
You can sort the traffic information by distance
from your current position.
:
When new traffic information is received, cur-
rent information is changed or old information
has been removed, the list is updated to reflect
the new situation.
Checking all traffic information
1
Touch [Info/Traffic] in [NAVI MENU],
then touch [Traffic Events].
The list with received traffic information is
shown.
3
Select an incident you want to view in
detail.
The details of the selected incident are dis-
played.
66
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
Editing the Navigation Utilities
05
p Touching an incident you want to see allows
you to view the detailed information of the
incident. If the information cannot be dis-
played on one screen, touch or to view
the remaining information.
p When
is displayed, the data is
being loaded from the DVD Map Disc.
2 A line to indicate the length of the traffic
congestion
Displayed only when the scale on the map is
0.75 mile (1km) or lower.
Traffic congestion:
Orange with white outline: stop and go traf-
fic
4
Touch [Back] to return to the list with
traffic information.
A list with traffic information appears again.
Red with white outline: stopped traffic
Black with white outline: closed/blocked
roads
Checking traffic information on the
route
%
Touch [Info/Traffic] in NAVI MENU, and
3 Icon for traffic information
then touch [Traffic On Route].
The currently set traffic information on the
route appears on the screen.
Appears only when the scale on the map is
10 miles (20 km) or lower.
If you want to check the traffic information de-
tails, move the scroll cursor onto the icon,
such as , and touch . This allows you to
view place names and other information.
p The method for checking the content dis-
played on the screen is the same for
Confirming traffic information
on the map
Information on avoiding traffic
congestion on route ahead
The traffic-related information displayed on
the map is as follows.
If you are approaching traffic on your current
route, the navigation system has the ability to
recommend an alternative route. Depending
on the information of traffic congestion you
have received and the setting of Use traffic
flow information, the navigation system will re-
commend an alternate route automatically.
On the freeway, the navigation system will de-
tect at least 1.6 miles (2.6 km) ahead of the
specific traffic incident.
3
2
1
If a better route can be calculated, the follow-
ing screen will appear.
p The following types of traffic incidents on
the route will be checked: stop and go,
stopped traffic and closed/blocked roads.
(or
,
):
1 TRAFFIC icon
When a route has been calculated, touch to
check whether there is any traffic congestion
information on your route. When no route has
been calculated, touch to display the traffic
list.
p When
is displayed, reading from
the DVD Map Disc is required. Please
insert the DVD Map Disc.
67
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
05
Editing the Navigation Utilities
Distance from the current position of your vehicle to
the point of entry into the new route
If there is a traffic congestion
information on the route
When receiving information about a traffic
congestion, the message announcing the pre-
sence of a traffic congestion is indicated.
On this screen, you can select the following
items:
Yes:
The route is recalculated taking the traffic con-
gestion into account.
Difference in distance and travel time between existing
route and new route
No:
On this screen, you can select the following
items:
The message disappears, and the map display
reappears.
New:
List:
A new route is displayed on the screen.
The list with traffic information is displayed.
p In the memory navi mode, you can only se-
lect [No].
Current:
The current route is displayed on the screen.
OK:
If there is no traffic congestion
information on the route
If there is no traffic congestion information, a
message appears to inform you that there is
no traffic congestion information on the route
that is shown.
Select the route that is displayed on the
screen.
p When no selection is made, the current
route will be automatically selected after a
short while.
On this screen, you can select the following
items:
When checking traffic congestion
information manually
List:
Touching
on the screen allows you to
The list with all traffic information is displayed.
check for traffic congestion information on
your route. If there is any information about a
traffic congestion on your route, a message
appears asking you whether to search for an-
other route to avoid the traffic congestion. If
there is no traffic congestion information
along the route being guided, it is announced
on screen and by voice.
Back:
The message disappears, and the screen re-
turns to the map screen.
p In the memory navi mode, you can only se-
lect [Back].
p The following types of traffic incidents on
the route will be checked: stop and go,
stopped traffic and closed/blocked roads.
68
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
Editing the Navigation Utilities
Traffic flow information
When the map scale is between 0.02 mile
(25 m) to 0.75 mile (1 km), red, yellow, or green
blinking lines may appear on either side of a
road. These colors indicate the average speed
at which traffic is flowing along these streets.
Here is a guide to the colors and the average
speed they indicate:
05
%
Touch [Info/Traffic] in NAVI MENU, then
touch [Traffic Flow].
You can use instead of
in the traf-
fic events list screen. The list with the traffic
flow information is shown.
The list will be sorted according to the average
speed by touching
.
The line for traffic flow
Selecting traffic information to
display
There are different types of traffic information
that can be received via the XM NavTraffic ser-
vice, and you can select which types will be in-
corporated and displayed on your navigation
system.
1
Touch [Info/Traffic] in NAVI MENU, and
then touch [Traffic Settings].
Flow Icon
The icon for the traffic information currently
being displayed appears on the screen.
Red: average speed in this area is between
5 mph to 15 mph (8 km/h to 24 km/h)
Yellow: average speed in this area is between
20 mph to 40 mph (32 km/h to 64 km/h)
Green: average speed in this area is 45 mph
(72 km/h) or faster (An icon without a number
indicates the average speed of the road is
more than 70 mph (112 km/h))
2
Touch [Change].
The names of the displayed traffic information
items and a list of icons appears on the
screen.
p In addition to these blinking lines, a round
icon with a number may appear on the
map. The number in the icon indicates the
actual average speed of that specific area.
p The flow icon appears only when the scale
on the map is 10 miles (20 km) or lower.
p You can turn off the use of Traffic flow infor-
mation.
3
Touch the traffic information item to
display.
A red check appears next to the selected traf-
fic information.
Checking traffic flow information on
the list
The traffic flow information on the route can
also be displayed as an onscreen list.
p The method for checking the traffic flow in-
formation displayed on the screen is the
p Touching [All] selects all the traffic informa-
tion.
69
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
05
Editing the Navigation Utilities
p Touch [Back] to not add the selected traffic
Displaying stock prices
This navigation system can display the prices
of up to 12 stocks.
information.
4
Touch [Done].
The selected traffic information icon is added
to the screen.
p The following types of traffic congestion
cannot be deselected and are always dis-
played: stop and go, stopped traffic, and
closed/blocked roads.
%
Touch [Info/Traffic] in NAVI MENU, and
then touch [Stock Info].
5
Touch [Back].
Set use of Traffic flow information
setting to off
The screen displays a list of stock prices.
p Although the stock price information dis-
played onscreen is updated every 30 sec-
onds (approx.), these prices are not real-
time values.
1
Touch [Info/Traffic] in NAVI MENU, and
then touch [Traffic Settings].
2
Touch [On].
Registering stocks to be displayed
1
Touch [Info/Traffic] in NAVI MENU, and
then touch [Stock Info].
2
Touch [Add].
The button changes to [Off].
3
Touch [Back].
p If you wish to use the traffic flow informa-
tion again, touch [Off] to turn the button
[On] in Traffic Settings screen.
3
Input the Ticker text for the stocks you
wish to display, then touch [OK].
Using the XM Tuner to View
Stock, Sports, and Other
Information
When an XM tuner (GEX-P10XMT) is con-
nected, you can receive stock price, sports,
and other information, and display it onscreen.
You may also register favorite information on
the navigation system.
Punc.:
You can input punctuation such as “!”and “:”.
Oper.:
You can input operators such as “+”and “–”.
70
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
Editing the Navigation Utilities
05
p The method for inputting the text is the
same as for inputting street names.
Refer to How to set your destination by ad-
2
Touch the category you want to browse
from the list.
p If the input ticker symbol does not match
the actual ticker symbol for the stock com-
pletely, you may not be able to find it.
Deleting stocks to be displayed onscreen
This navigation system can display the prices
of up to 12 stocks. If 12 stocks are already re-
gistered, delete as many entries as necessary
to add new stocks.
3
Touch an item you wish to store.
1
Touch [Info/Traffic] in NAVI MENU, and
then touch [Stock Info].
2
3
Touch [Delete].
Touch the ticker of the stock you wish
If an item is divided into more detail cate-
gories, select the one from the list to narrow
down the category. After narrowing down, the
message confirming whether or not to register
the item will appear.
to delete.
A red check appears next to the ticker you
touched.
p To delete all the registered stocks, touch
[All]. Red checks will appear next to all the
tickers.
4
Touch [OK].
4
5
Touch [Delete].
A message will appear asking you to
confirm the deletion. Touch [OK].
Storing browsable information
p The displayed items depend on the infor-
mation which is sent from each station.
p [My Favorites] can store up to 50 items.
If the storing step is successful, the confirma-
tion screen will appear.
Touch [OK] to complete the storing and return
to the previous screen.
1
Touch [Info/Traffic] in NAVI MENU, then
touch [Set My Favorites].
The screen will display a list of categories. The
information appearing onscreen is automati-
cally updated at regular intervals.
Displaying favorite browsable
Information
XM special contents can be assigned as a
shortcut or “My Favorites” so that it can be
accessed without having to search every time
an update is needed. The following are the in-
structions on how to do so:
71
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
05
Editing the Navigation Utilities
Depending on the XM tuner’s (GEX-
P10XMT) reception status, any one of the
following may appear.
1
2
Store the desired item (topic).
!
!
!
!
OK
No problem.
Touch [Info/Traffic] in NAVI MENU, and
then touch [My Favorites].
Updating
Updating encryption code.
A list of registered items (topics) appears on
the screen. Touch the item to display informa-
tion about this item.
Check antenna
Improper antenna connection.
Deleting favorite browsable information
Not Connected
2 Signal Strength
1
Touch [Info/Traffic] in NAVI MENU, and
Depending on the signal strength, any one
of the following may appear.
then touch [My Favorites].
2
3
Touch [Delete].
!
!
!
!
!
Very Strong
Strong
Marginal
Weak
Touch the name of the items you wish
to delete.
A red check appears next to the items you
touched.
No signal
3 Radio ID
The radio ID appears.
p To delete all favorite contents, touch [All].
Red checks will appear next to all items.
p If you have subscribed to either XM
audio only or XM NavTraffic stand alone,
you will see [Updating] in [Status]. This
is because the GEX-P10XMT is con-
stantly checking to see if you have
decided to add the other service while
your navigation system is turned on. If
you subscribe to both services, the ap-
propriate status will be shown in
[Status].
4
5
Touch [Delete].
A message will appear asking you to
confirm the deletion. Touch [OK].
Checking the Reception
Status of the XM Tuner
The current XM tuner’s (GEX-P10XMT) recep-
tion status and signal strength appear on
screen. (The information that is transmitted
via XM DATA cable is displayed in this screen.)
Emergency Info
The Emergency Info screen provides impor-
tant emergency information pertaining to your
vehicle, insurance, and current location. Such
emergency information could be useful in the
event of an accident or vehicle breakdown.
The accuracy of the personal information is
dependent on the accuracy of the information
entered into the navigation system by the user.
%
Touch [Info/Traffic] in NAVI MENU, and
then touch [XM Status].
1
2
3
1 Status
72
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
Editing the Navigation Utilities
05
to charges by Signature’s Nationwide Auto
Club, Inc. You are also subject to charges
by Signature’s Nationwide Auto Club, Inc.
for roadside services not included in the
Emergency Roadside Assistance service.
The terms and conditions regarding the
Emergency Roadside Assistance service
provided by Signature’s Nationwide Auto
Club, Inc. are determined solely and exclu-
sively by Signature’s Nationwide Auto Club,
Inc. Please contact Signature’s Nationwide
Auto Club, Inc. for more information. The
telephone number that appears here by de-
fault is the toll free number for this service.
For additional details on registering for this
service, please check your product registra-
tion card included with this product. If you
are not interested in the free Roadside As-
sistance service, this number can be edited
and replaced by your own roadside assis-
tance telephone number.
WARNING
The Emergency Info screen is only intended to
provide information to a driver that may be useful
during an emergency situation, and does not re-
place the need to call for emergency assistance,
when necessary.
Checking the information
registered as Emergency Info
Touch [Info/Traffic] in NAVI MENU, and
then touch [Emergency Info].
%
1
2
p The police number is shown as 911 and
cannot be changed.
4
3
4 Locate Car Service
The information registered as Emergency Info
appears on the screen.
1 You are currently at:
Your current position is indicated by the
street name, latitude, and longitude.
2 Personal Information:
Registering user information
1
Touch [Info/Traffic] in NAVI MENU, and
Your VIN number, insurance policy number,
and the telephone number of your insur-
ance company can be displayed once en-
tered by the user.
then touch [Emergency Info].
2
3
Touch [Setup].
3 Emergency TOW service phone:
1 year of free Emergency Roadside Assis-
tance service is available to all registered
owners and provided by Signature’s Nation-
wide Auto Club, Inc. The first year of Emer-
gency Roadside Assistance service is paid
for by Pioneer only if your navigation system
is registered with Pioneer and you sign up
on-line with Signature’s Nationwide Auto
Club, Inc. at the time you register your navi-
gation system with Pioneer. If you have not
signed up for this service with Signature’s
Nationwide Auto Club, Inc., or if your free
one-year period has expired, you are subject
Touch the desired item to register your
information.
p If information is already registered, the re-
gistered information will appear.
73
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
05
Editing the Navigation Utilities
4
Input the number you wish to register,
1
Touch [Info/Traffic] in NAVI MENU, and
and then touch [OK].
then touch [Emergency Info].
2
Touch [Locate Car Service].
Edit VIN:
Register your Vehicle’s Identification Number.
(You can enter between 1 and 17 digits.)
Edit Policy number:
A list of auto services appears onscreen.
Touch the Category of the auto service
3
Register your insurance policy number.
you wish to use.
A red check appears next to the selected cate-
gory.
Edit Insurance Phone:
Register your insurance company’s phone
number.
p The Auto Service categories that can be se-
lected in Emergency Info are;
[Automotive], [Rental Car Agency], and
[Car Dealer].
Edit TOW Service Phone:
Record a towing company’s phone number.
5
Touch [Save].
Completes the registration.
p If you want to stop registration, touch
[Back].
4
Touch [OK].
A list of names of facilities in the vicinity and
the distances from your current position will
be displayed.
p Touching displays a list of subcategories.
Touch the subcategories you wish to use
from among those displayed and touch
[OK] to select the Auto Service from the
subcategories.
Searching for car service in an
emergency
In times of emergency, you can search the
Emergency Info for Auto Services in the vici-
nity of your current position and set the cur-
rent route.
WARNING
The Emergency Info screen is only intended to
provide information to a driver that may be useful
during an emergency situation and if they are in
a safe location. If not, or in all major accidents,
call 911.
74
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
Editing the Navigation Utilities
05
5
Touch the name of the facility to set the
In the menu operation screen, you can specify
a picture for the background. Some pictures
are already stored, but you can also use pic-
tures (JPEG format data) created by a personal
computer or a digital camera. If you save the
pictures to a CD-R/-RW and DVD-R/-RW, you
can use them as background pictures. The fol-
lowing three types of background pictures can
be changed:
route you want.
!
Splash Screen: The screen that appears
when the Navigation system starts up.
Displays the route to the selected facility.
!
AV Background: Background for the
screen during AV operations or during play-
back.
When appears to the right of the list
You can also set a destination by touching
to the right of the destination list such as Ad-
dress Book. Touch [OK] to confirm. The loca-
tion indicated by the scroll cursor will be set
as a destination.
!
Navigation Background: Background of
navigation menu screen.
Several background pictures are stored in the
Pioneer DVD Map Disc. If you want to use
these pictures, insert the Pioneer DVD Map
Disc.
Here, a method for changing the background
picture is described with an example of load-
ing a picture stored on a CD-R/-RW and DVD-
R/-RW onto the navigation system as the back-
ground picture.
p When storing original pictures on a CD-R/-
RW and DVD-R/-RW, create a folder named
“PICTURES” in the CD-R/-RW and DVD-R/-
RW, and store the picture files in this folder.
Up to 20 picture files can be used in
PICTURES folder.
Scroll:
The map display changes to Shortcut menu.
If you touch anywhere on the map, the map
display changes to Scroll mode.
p You cannot use a CD-R/-RW and DVD-R/-
RW containing MP3/WMA/AAC files or the
Audio data part (CD-DA session) for Back-
ground Picture Setting function.
p Only JPEG format (“.jpg” or “.JPG”) pictures
can be used as a background picture.
p You can only use standard characters (al-
phabets of both cases: A-Z, a-z) and num-
bers (0-9) for the file name of a background
picture (international (accented) characters
cannot be used).
Changing Background Picture
CAUTION
When you burn a CD-R/-RW and DVD-R/-RW,
make sure the total data size of the CD-R/-RW
and DVD-R/-RW is greater than the amount noted
below by storing dummy data or other filler infor-
mation. Otherwise, the disc may not be recog-
nized by the built-in DVD drive.
p Pictures up to a maximum of 2 048×1 536
pixels can be used. We cannot guarantee
proper operation for a picture bigger than
this size.
!
!
CD-R/-RW: 1.8 MB
DVD-R/-RW: 170 MB
75
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
05
Editing the Navigation Utilities
p Progressive format JPEG pictures cannot
Repeat:
be used.
Selected picture is repeated in a pattern to
cover the whole screen.
The background image starts changing. After
a short while, the new background image ap-
pears.
p When you select images stored on the
Pioneer DVD Map Disc, you cannot select
the layout method.
p When the picture starts to change, do not
turn off the vehicle engine until the mes-
sage appears to indicate that the picture
has finished changing.
1
2
Insert a disc to the disc loading slot.
Touch [Settings] in NAVI MENU, then
touch [System Options].
3
Touch [Background Picture Setting].
The picture selected for each screen is indi-
cated on the right side of [Splash Screen],
[Navigation Background] and [AV Back-
ground] items.
4
Touch [Splash Screen], [Navigation
Background] or [AV Background].
8
Touch [Done].
On this screen, you can select the following
items:
5
Touch [Import from Disc].
The list of the pictures stored in the disc is dis-
played.
Select another Picture:
This is selected when you want to change to
another picture. Return to Step 5.
On this screen, you can select the following
item:
Back to Original:
The picture originally used when the system
was purchased is selected.
Change another background:
Select if you want to successively change the
Splash Screen, AV operation screen back-
grounds or the Navigation backgrounds. Re-
turn to step 3.
p When the navigation system is reset, or the
language setting is changed, the back-
ground picture may change back to the ori-
ginal picture. (There is also a possibility that
the system will revert to the original picture
for some other reason.) If this happens, set
the background picture again.
p Only when a Pioneer DVD Map Disc is in-
serted, you can select [Back to Original].
Only when the CD-R/-RW and DVD-R/-RW
is inserted, you can select [Import from
Disc].
p Touching other than [Import from Disc] al-
lows you to select a background image
stored on the Pioneer DVD Map Disc.
6
Touch a picture you want for the back-
ground.
7
Select how to display the picture.
Setting Vehicle Dynamics
Display
You can change the values displayed by the in-
struments on the left and right of Vehicle Dy-
namics Display.
You can select the following items:
Center:
Selected picture is displayed at the center of
the screen.
76
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
Editing the Navigation Utilities
05
Until the sensor’s initial learning is complete,
only the voltage and clock are displayed.
terns from among those displayed onscreen to
change the panel to the selected pattern.
p If you touch [Peak Hold Reset], the maxi-
mum and minimum (green line) values indi-
cated in [Acceleration] and [Side
Acceleration] are reset.
p You cannot change the speedometer at the
center.
p Selecting Demo Mode in Settings menu
enables you to perform a demonstration
with random values.
1
Switch to Vehicle Dynamics Display.
= For details concerning operations, refer to
2
Touch the left or right instrument.
Touch panel keys are displayed.
3
Touch the items you want to display.
Checking the Navigation
Status
The navigation status, including the driving
status of a vehicle, positioning status by satel-
lite, learning status of the 3D sensor and cable
connection status, can be checked.
You can select the following items:
Voltage:
Displays the power supply and voltage sup-
plied from the battery to this system.
Checking sensor learning
status and driving status
Acceleration:
Displays acceleration in a forward direction. +
sign indicates acceleration while - sign indi-
cates deceleration.
1
Touch [Settings] in NAVI MENU, then
touch [Hardware Info].
2
Touch [3D Calibration].
Side Acceleration:
The 3D Calibration Status screen appears.
Displays acceleration in a side direction, such
as when turning. + sign indicates a right turn,
while - sign indicates a left turn.
1
2
3
Angular Velocity:
Displays the vehicle’s turning angle over one
second (how far it has turned in a second).
4
Slope:
Displays the vehicle’s vertical movement. +
side represents the rising angle, and - side the
falling angle.
6
7
5
1 Distance
Driving distance is indicated.
2 Speed Pulse
Total number of speed pulses is indicated.
3 Learning Status
Current driving mode is indicated.
Direction:
Displays the direction your vehicle is traveling
in.
Clock:
Displays the current time.
Adjust Look:
Touch [Adjust Look] to display a screen for se-
lecting the panel pattern. Touch one of the pat-
77
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
05
Editing the Navigation Utilities
4 Degree of learning
Checking the connections of
leads and installation positions
Check that leads are properly connected be-
tween the navigation system and the vehicle.
Please also check whether they are connected
in the correct positions.
Sensor learning situations for distance (Dis-
tance), right turn (Right Turn), left turn
(Left Turn) and 3D detection (3D) are indi-
cated by the length of bars.
p When tires have been changed or chains
fitted, turning on the Speed Pulse allows
the system to detect the fact that the tire
diameter has changed, and automati-
cally replaces the value for calculating
distance.
1
Touch [Settings] in NAVI MENU, then
touch [Hardware Info].
2
Touch [Connection Status].
The Connection Status screen appears.
p If ND-PG1 is connected, the distance cal-
culation value cannot be replaced auto-
matically.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
5 Speed
Speed detected by the navigation system is
indicated. (This indication may be different
from the actual speed of your vehicle, so
please do not use this instead of the speed-
ometer of your vehicle.)
6 Acceleration or deceleration/Rotational
speed
Acceleration or deceleration velocity of your
vehicle is indicated. Also, rotational speed
when your vehicle turns to left or right is
shown.
1 Speed Pulse
The Speed Pulse value detected by the navi-
gation system is shown. “0” is shown while
the vehicle is stationary.
2 GPS Antenna
Indicates the connection status of the GPS
antenna, the reception sensitivity and from
how many satellites the signal is received.
If the signal is received correctly, [OK] is dis-
played. If reception is poor, [NOK] appears.
3 Installation Position
7 Inclination
Degree of slope of the street that you are
currently running is indicated.
The installation position of the navigation
system is shown.
To clear values...
If installed correctly, [OK] appears. Indicates
whether the installation position of the navi-
gation system is correct or not. When the
navigation system is installed at an extreme
angle exceeding the limitation of the instal-
ling angle, [Incorrect angle] will be dis-
played. When the angle of the navigation
system has been changed, [Excessive vi-
bration] will be displayed.
If you want to delete the learned results stored
in [Distance], [Speed Pulse] or [Learning Sta-
tus], touch the relevant result, then touch
[Clear].
p The navigation system can automatically
use its sensor memory based on the outer
dimensions of the tires.
4 Parking Brake
When the parking brake is applied, [On] is
displayed. When the parking brake is re-
leased, [Off] is displayed.
78
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
Editing the Navigation Utilities
05
5 Power Voltage
The power supply (reference value) provided
from the vehicle battery to the navigation
system is shown. If the voltage does not fall
within the range of 11 V to 15 V, check that
power cable connection is correct.
6 Illumination
When the headlights or small lamps of a ve-
hicle are on, [On] is displayed. (If the or-
ange/white lead is not connected, [Off]
appears.)
7 Back Signal
When the gear lever is shifted to “R”, the sig-
nal switches to [High] or [Low]. (Which of
these is displayed depends on the
vehicle.)
79
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
06
Customizing Your Navigation System
[Mile&Yard] is displayed below [KM / Mile
Setting], indicating that [KM / Mile Setting]
is set to [Mile&Yard].
If you want to change another setting, select
the item you want to change and repeat the
procedure in step 3.
CAUTION
For safety reasons, you cannot use some of these
navigation functions while your vehicle is in mo-
tion. To enable these functions, you must stop in
a safe place and apply the parking brake (refer to
Items Users can Change
Modifying the Default
Settings
You can tailor default settings, such as naviga-
tion functions and information display, for
ease of use.
This section describes the details of the set-
ting for each item. Settings marked with an as-
terisk (*) show that they are default or factory
settings.
The following example describes how to
change settings. In this example, the [KM /
Mile Setting] settings is set to [Mile&Yard].
Volume
The sound volume for the navigation can be
set. You can set the volume of the route gui-
dance and of the beep sound separately.
To display the Volume setting screen, touch
[Volume] in Settings menu.
1
Touch [Settings] in NAVI MENU.
Settings menu appears.
2
Touch [System Options].
The screen changes. [Mile] is displayed below
[KM / Mile Setting], indicating that this func-
tion is currently set to [Mile].
p When you touch items with a setting below
them, their setting changes. When you
touch items with no setting below them, a
setting screen appears.
p Touching [Back] switch to Settings Menu.
p When you move to the Volume setting
screen by touching [Volume] in Settings
menu, touching [Back] returns you to Set-
tings menu screen.
3
Touch [KM / Mile Setting].
Guidance Volume
Touch [+] or [-] to change the Guidance vo-
lume.
Beep Volume
Touch [+] or [-] to change the Beep volume.
Voice Guidance
This setting controls whether the volume of
the AV source is automatically muted during
voice guidance.
80
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
Customizing Your Navigation System
06
On*:
Average Speed
During voice guidance, the volume of the AV
source is muted automatically.
Off:
Volume of the AV source stays the same dur-
ing voice guidance.
p When [Voice Guidance] is [On], be sure to
set [Mute Input/Guide] setting in AV
MENU to [Mute] or [ATT].
When calculating estimated time of arrival
and the number of hours to the destination,
set the average speed for the freeway or ordin-
ary road using [+] and [-].
Minor Ordinary Road:
!
When [KM / Mile Setting] is set to [Mile]
or [Mile&Yard], it can be set in 5 mile in-
crements from 10 miles to 100 miles (35
miles*).
!
When [KM / Mile Setting] is set to [km], it
can be set in 5 km increments from 20 km
to 110 km (55 km*).
System Options
Touch [System Options] in Settings menu to
display.
Major Ordinary Road:
!
When [KM / Mile Setting] is set to [Mile]
or [Mile&Yard], it can be set in 5 mile in-
crements from 10 miles to 120 miles (45
miles*).
!
When [KM / Mile Setting] is set to [km], it
can be set in 5 km increments from 20 km
to 150 km (70 km*).
Freeway:
!
When [KM / Mile Setting] is set to [Mile]
or [Mile&Yard], it can be set in 5 mile in-
crements from 30 miles to 120 miles (60
miles*).
Language Selection
Once you change the language, installation of
the program starts.
!
When [KM / Mile Setting] is set to [km], it
can be set in 5 km increments from 60 km
to 150 km (95 km*).
Background Picture Setting
CAUTION
Once the installation of the program starts, do
not stop the engine of your vehicle and do not
switch off the navigation system until the installa-
tion is completed and the map of your surround-
ings appears.
Read from Disc
KM / Mile Setting
This setting controls the unit of distance dis-
played on your navigation system.
Mile *:
Show distances in miles.
Mile&Yard:
Show distances in miles and yards.
km:
Show distances in kilometers.
81
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
06
Customizing Your Navigation System
: Route Options
Short-Cut Selection
Displays Route Options menu.
= For details concerning operations, refer to
Select shortcuts to display on the map screen.
In the list displayed onscreen, the items with
red checks are displayed on Shortcut menu.
Touch the shortcut you wish to display and
then touch [Done] when a red check appears.
You can select up to three shortcuts.
: Edit Current Route
Displays the screen for adding or deleting way
points.
= For details concerning operations, refer to
: Traffic On Route
Displays a list of traffic information on the
route.
: Registration*
Register information about the location indi-
cated by the scroll cursor to Address Book.
: Vicinity Search*
: Stock Info
Find POIs (Points Of Interest) in the vicinity of
the scroll cursor.
Displays share prices.
: Set My Favorites
: Volume Setting*
Displays XM tuner content information.
Set the sound volume for the navigation.
= For details concerning operations, refer to
: My Favorites
: Whole Route Overview
Displays the entire currently set route.
Displays information on your favorite item.
: Overlay POI
Displays marks for surrounding facilities (POI)
on the map.
Map Display Options
Touch [Map Display Options] in Settings
Menu to display.
: Address Book
Displays Address Book.
= For details concerning operations, refer to
82
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
Customizing Your Navigation System
06
Tracking Display
Arrow in AV
The tracking display setting has the following
options.
Set whether to display the guidance informa-
tion with arrows on the AV operation screen.
Always:
Display tracking for all journeys.
This Trip:
Display tracking dots but erase them when the
navigation system is turned off (when turning
off the engine of your vehicle).
Off*:
On*:
Displays guidance information with arrows on
the AV operation screen.
Off:
Does not display guidance information with
arrows on the AV operation screen.
Do not display tracking dots.
Defined Locations
Touch [Defined Locations] in Settings menu
to display.
AV Guide Mode
Set whether to automatically switch to the na-
vigation screen from the AV operation screen
when your vehicle approaches a guidance
point such as an intersection while displaying
a screen other than navigation.
On*:
Switches from AV operation screen to naviga-
tion screen.
Off:
Set ”Home”
Does not switch the screen.
= For details concerning operations, refer to
Day/Night Display
To improve the visibility of the map during the
evening, you can change the combination of
the colors of the map.
Map in Memory
The memory area is the area in the map,
which is being read in advance for the mem-
ory navi mode. There are two ways of setting
the memory area.
Nighttime*:
You can change the combination of the colors
of a map according to whether the vehicle
lights are On or Off.
Daytime:
The map is always displayed with bright col-
ors.
Close-up of Junction
This setting enables switching to an enlarged
map around the point where your vehicle is
approaching an intersection, entrance/exit of
freeway or a junction.
Around Current Position:
A square that has sides of approximately 10.6
miles (17 km) with the selected location at the
center is read into the memory.
Indicate the map you want to store in the
memory by touching c, d, a or b. Then, ad-
just the map scale to the one you desire, and
touch [OK].
On*:
Switches to an enlarged map.
Off:
Does not switch to an enlarged map.
83
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
06
Customizing Your Navigation System
Continuously touching c, d, a or b allows
Demo Mode
you to rapidly scroll the map screen.
p An area not stored in the DVD Map Disc
cannot be memorized.
This is a demonstration function for shops.
After a route is set, a simulation of route gui-
dance to a destination is automatically dis-
played. Normally, set this to [Off].
Around Current Route:
Sets the surrounding currently set route to the
memory area. The route to the destination will
appear on screen. You can memorize the area
by touching [OK].
p The extent of the information that can be
set in the memory area is about 6.6 miles
(10.6 km) surrounding the route.
Repeat:
Repeat demo drive.
Off*:
Demo Mode is set off.
p If you eject the DVD Map Disc during the
demo drive, the demo mode will be
stopped.
Set ”Go To”
= For details concerning operations, refer to
Time
Adjusts the systems clock. The time difference
(+, -) between the time originally set in your
navigation system is set here.
You can also select summer time On/Off.
Summer Time
Choose whether or not to take summer time
into account.
On:
Summer time is taken into account.
Off*:
Summer time is not taken into account.
p When the period of summer time comes,
or when the summer time ends, this unit
does not automatically change the summer
time setting.
Modify Current Location
Touch the screen to adjust the current position
and direction of the vehicle displayed on the
map.
84
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
Customizing Your Navigation System
06
Hardware Info
Touch [Hardware Info] in Settings menu to
display.
Connection Status
3D Calibration
Service Info Screen
Displays the disc production number and ver-
sion information.
Restore Factory Settings
Reset various settings registered to the naviga-
tion system and restores to the default or fac-
tory settings. To restore, touch [Yes].
p About the item return to the default, please
85
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
07
Using the AV Source (Built-in DVD Drive and Radio)
This chapter describes how to display AV
MENU for AV operations and perform opera-
tions with the DVD drive and radio.
How to Display each Menu
1
Press VOLUME knob (or AV button) to
switch to the AV operation screen.
2
Press MENU button to change to AV
MENU.
3
Touch [Sound], [Function] or [System]
to enter the menu you want to operate.
Each menu is displayed. The items that cannot
be operated according to the sources or condi-
tions are indicated in gray.
p If you touch [AV Source], the screen
changes to AV Source screen.
86
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
Using the AV Source (Built-in DVD Drive and Radio)
07
Function menu
2
3
1
Sound menu
System menu
p When the source is [OFF], [Function] key
Operating the Built-in DVD
drive
changes to [Initial] key.
1 Function key
This section explains the operation of DVD-
Video, CD, MP3/WMA/AAC or DivX.
p The built-in DVD drive of this unit can re-
cognize the several types of media as fol-
lowing sources:
Touch to enter Function menu for each
source.
= Using the Function menu d “Operating
using Function menu (each source)”
and “ Advanced <each source> opera-
tion”
— DVD-Video: “DVD-V”
— Audio data (CD-DA): “CD”
— Compressed audio (MP3/WMA/AAC)
files: “ROM”
— DivX video files: “DivX”
2 Sound key
Touch to select various sound quality con-
trols.
handling each media.
3 System key
Touch to select various setup functions.
4
Press MENU button to return to the dis-
play of each source.
87
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
07
Using the AV Source (Built-in DVD Drive and Radio)
DVD-Video
1
2
3
7 6
4
5
1 Source icon
2 Title number indicator
3 Chapter or file number indicator
4 Play time indicator
CD
1
8
4
5 Viewing angle indicator
6 Subtitle language indicator
7 Audio language indicator
8 Track number indicator
9
a
9 Repeat/Random/Scan indicator
The marks shown below indicate the current
playback status.
ROM (MP3/WMA/AAC files)
1
c
8
4
and repeat range: Displays the repeat
range
d
: Random
: Scan
a Detail information display
Displays the track title, artist and disc title.
a
9
b
: Track title
: Artist
DivX
: Disc title (album title)
p The “–” mark is displayed if there is no
corresponding information.
1
c
3
e 6
4
f
See the following pages for instructions on op-
erating each type of disc.
88
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
Using the AV Source (Built-in DVD Drive and Radio)
07
b Current folder name indicator
c Folder number indicator
d File type indicator
2
Touch the screen to display the touch
panel keys.
Touch panel keys (Page 1)
e Audio indicator
2
1
f Repeat indicator
Switching the media files type
2
6
When playing a disc containing a mixture of
various media file types such as DivX and
MP3, you can switch between media files
types to play.
7
4
3
%
Touch [Media] to switch between
Touch panel keys (Page 2)
media file types.
Touch [Media] repeatedly to switch between
the following media file types:
CD (audio data (CD-DA)) — ROM (MP3/WMA/
AAC files) — DivX (DivX video files)
p There is sometimes a delay between start-
ing up playback and the sound being is-
sued. This is particularly the case when
playing back multi-session discs and discs
with many folders. When being read in,
Reading Format is displayed.
8
5
7
4
3
7
4
3
Touch panel keys (Page 3)
p Playback is carried out in order of file num-
ber. Folders are skipped if they contain no
files. (If folder 001 (ROOT) contains no files,
playback commences with folder 002.)
p When playing back files recorded as VBR
(variable bit rate) files, the play time will not
be correctly displayed if fast forward or re-
wind operations are used.
p With some discs, the icon 9 may be dis-
played, meaning that the operation is not
valid.
p If more than 255 tracks are stored in the
folder, some time may be required to dis-
play the track list.
1 Playback and Pause
Pause lets you temporarily stop disc play-
back. Touching f switches between
“playback” and “pause”.
p The icon e is displayed and playback is
paused letting you view a still image.
Touch panel key operation (DVD-V)
1
Touch [DISC] in AV Source screen to se-
lect the built-in DVD drive.
If no disc is loaded in navigation system, you
cannot select [DISC] (built-in DVD drive).
89
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
07
Using the AV Source (Built-in DVD Drive and Radio)
2 Skip the chapter forward or backward
Operation using Function menu
(DVD-V)
Touching p skips to the start of the next
chapter. Touching o once skips to the
start of the current chapter. Touching again
will skip to the previous chapter.
p You can also select a chapter by pressing
o or p button on the hardware.
Function menu
3 Hide the touch panel keys
Touching [Hide] clears the touch panel
keys. Touch anywhere on the LCD screen,
display the touch panel keys again.
4 Switch the display
Touching [Disp] changes the information as
follows:
Disc information display — Repeat range
display
1
2
3
1 Repeating play
Each touch of [Repeat] changes the set-
tings as follows:
!
!
Title — Repeat just the current title
Chapter — Repeat just the current chap-
ter
5 Skip the title forward or backward
Touching a skips to the start of the next
title. Touching b skips to the start of the pre-
vious title.
!
Disc — Play throughout the current disc
p If you perform chapter (title) search, fast
forward/rewind or slow motion playback,
the repeat play range changes to [Disc].
6 Stop playback
When you stop playback by touching g,
that location on the disc is memorized en-
abling playback from that point when you
play the disc again.
2 Selecting audio output
When playing DVD-Video discs recorded
with LPCM audio, you can switch the audio
output. Touch [L/R Select] repeatedly until
the desired audio output appears in the dis-
play.
p To play the disc again, touch f.
7 Switch to other pages of touch panel
keys
!
!
!
!
L+R — Left and right
L — Left
R — Right
8 Fast rewind or forward
Touching m or n to perform fast rewind
or forward. If you keep touching m or n
for five seconds, the icon m or n
Mix — Mixing left and right
p This function is not available when disc
playback has been stopped.
changes into
or
. When this hap-
pens, fast rewind/ fast forward continues
even if you release m or n. To resume
playback at a desired point, touch f, m
or n opposite to key pushed for five sec-
onds.
p You can also perform fast rewind/fast for-
ward by holding o or p button on
the hardware.
3 Setting Up the DVD/DivX Player
Other functions (DVD-V)
Operating the DVD menu
Some DVDs allow you to select from the disc
contents using a menu.
90
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
Using the AV Source (Built-in DVD Drive and Radio)
07
p Touch [Touch] to switch direct touch con-
p This function is available for DVD-Video.
p You can display the menu by touching
[Menu] or [TOP M.] while a disc is playing.
Touching either of these keys again lets you
start playback from the location selected
from the menu. For details, refer to the in-
structions provided with the disc.
trol.
Frame-by-frame playback
This lets you move ahead one frame at a time
during playback.
Using DVD menu direct touch control
%
Touch r during playback.
Each time you touch r, you move ahead one
frame.
To return to normal playback, touch f.
p With some discs, images may be unclear
during frame-by-frame playback.
This function allows you to operate the DVD
menu by touching the menu item on the
screen directly.
Slow motion playback
This lets you slow down playback speed.
1
Keep touching r until
during playback.
The icon is displayed, forward slow motion
is displayed
p This function can be used when the
key is displayed on the lower right corner of
the LCD screen.
p Depending on the contents of DVD discs,
this function may not work properly. In this
case, use touch panel keys to operate the
DVD menu.
playback begins.
To return to normal playback, touch f.
2
Press r to adjust playback speed dur-
ing slow motion playback.
Each time you press r it changes the speed
in four steps in the following order:
1/16 — 1/8 — 1/4 — 1/2
p Touch
to operate DVD menu. And then touch
[ESC], key is not displayed.
key to display touch panel keys
p There is no sound during slow motion play-
back.
p With some discs, images may be unclear
during slow motion playback.
p Reverse slow motion playback is not possi-
ble.
Using DVD menu by touch panel keys
If
key is not displayed, DVD menu is op-
erated by touch panel keys.
1
Touch the screen to display the touch
Searching for a playback location
panel keys.
When playing back a DVD-Video, you can
search for a specific title, chapter or time to
begin playback.
p Chapter search and time search are not
possible when disc playback has been
stopped.
2
Touch
.
Touch panel keys to operate DVD menu ap-
pear.
3
Touch a, b, c or d to select the desired
menu item, and touch [Enter].
Playback starts from the selected menu item.
91
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
07
Using the AV Source (Built-in DVD Drive and Radio)
1
Touch [Search] and then touch desired
Changing the subtitle language
during playback (Multi-subtitle)
With DVDs featuring multi-subtitle recordings,
you can switch between subtitle languages
during playback.
item.
When playing a DVD, touch [Title] (title),
[Chapter] (chapter) or [Time] (time).
2
Touch 0 — 9 to input the desired num-
ber.
%
Touch [S.Title] during playback.
For titles and chapters
Each time you touch [S.Title] switches be-
tween subtitle language.
!
!
!
To select 3, touch 3.
To select 10, touch 1 and 0 in order.
To select 23, touch 2 and 3 in order.
p With some DVDs, switching between subti-
tle languages may only be possible using a
menu display.
p Touching [S.Title] during fast forward/fast
rewind, pause or slow motion playback re-
turns you to normal playback.
For time (time search)
!
To select 21 minutes 43 seconds, touch 2, 1,
4 and 3 in order.
To select 1 hour 11 minutes, convert the
time into 71 minutes 00 seconds and touch
7, 1, 0 and 0 in order.
!
Changing the viewing angle during
playback (Multi-angle)
To cancel the input numbers, touch [Clear].
3
While the input number is displayed,
With DVDs featuring multi-angle (scenes shot
from multiple angles) recordings, you can
switch among viewing angles during play-
back.
touch [Enter].
This starts playback from the selected scene.
p During playback of a scene shot from mul-
tiple angles, the angle icon is displayed.
Turn angle icon display on or off using
DVD/DivX Setup menu.
Changing audio system and audio
language during playback (Multi-audio)
With DVDs featuring multi-audio recordings,
you can switch between languages/audio sys-
tems during playback.
%
Touch [Audio] during playback.
%
Touch [Angle] during playback of a
Each time you touch [Audio] switches be-
tween audio mode.
scene shot from multiple angles.
Each time you touch [Angle] switches be-
tween angle.
p With some DVDs, switching between lan-
guages/audio systems may only be possible
while using a menu display.
p Display indications such as Dolby D and
M ch indicate the audio system recorded
on the DVD. Depending on the setting, play-
back may not be with the same audio sys-
tem as the one indicated.
p Touching [Angle] during fast forward/fast
rewind, pause or slow motion playback re-
turns you to normal playback.
Resume playback (Bookmark)
When playing DVD-Video discs, you can use
this function.
The Bookmark function lets you resume play-
back from a selected scene the next time the
disc is loaded.
p Touching [Audio] during fast forward/fast
rewind, pause or slow motion playback re-
turns you to normal playback.
92
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
Using the AV Source (Built-in DVD Drive and Radio)
07
Touching [B.Mark];
Touch panel keys (ROM)
You can bookmark a point for every five disc. If
you try to memorize a point for the same disc,
the oldest bookmark will be replaced by the
new one.
p To clear the bookmark on a disc, keep
touching [B.Mark] during playback.
2
1
4
2
Pressing and holding EJECT button;
You can also bookmark a point for one disc by
pressing and holding EJECT button. Next time
you load the same disc, playback will resume
from the bookmarked point. If you newly book-
mark a point for with this method, previous
bookmarked point will be overwritten.
p In playback, the point bookmarked with
this method is given priority over the point
bookmarked with using [B.Mark].
3
1 Playback and Pause
Pause lets you temporarily stop disc play-
back. Touching f switches between
“playback” and “pause”.
PAUSE is displayed and playback is paused.
2 Skip the track or file forward or back-
ward
Touching p skips to the start of the next
track or file. Touching o once skips to the
start of the current track or file. Touching
again will skip to the previous track or file.
p You can also select a track or file by
pressing o or p button on the hard-
ware.
Fast rewind or forward
Keep touching o or p to perform fast
rewind or forward.
Touch panel key operation (CD,
ROM)
1
Touch [DISC] in AV Source screen to se-
lect the built-in DVD drive.
If no disc is loaded in navigation system, you
cannot select [DISC] (built-in DVD drive).
2
Touch the screen to display the touch
p You can also perform fast rewind/fast for-
ward by holding o or p button on
the hardware.
panel keys.
Touch panel keys (CD)
2
1
3 Hide the touch panel keys
Touching [Hide] clears the touch panel
keys. Touch anywhere on the LCD screen,
display the touch panel keys again.
2
4 Move the folder
When a ROM is played, touch a or b to se-
lect the desired folder. You cannot select a
folder that does not have an MP3/WMA/
AAC file recorded in it.
3
93
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
07
Using the AV Source (Built-in DVD Drive and Radio)
p If the upper folder has no MP3/WMA/AAC
Displaying text information
Touch
The next piece of information is displayed.
files, the track or file currently playing will
not change.
%
.
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
Album Title (album title)
Track Title (track title)
Folder Title (folder title)
File Name (file name)
Artist Name (artist name)
Genre (genre)
Randomly play tracks with one touch
All of the songs in a disc can be played at ran-
dom by only touching one key.
%
Touch [Shuffle All].
To cancel the random play, switch [Random]
Year (year)
to [Off] in Function menu.
If specific information has not been recorded
on MP3/WMA/AAC files on disc, nothing may
be displayed.
Operation using Function menu
(CD, ROM)
Select the track from the list
The list lets you see the list of track titles, file
names or folder names on a disc and select
one of them to play back.
Function menu
1
2
3
%
Touch [List].
1 Repeating play
Each touch of [Repeat] changes the set-
tings as follows:
To return to the previous screen, touch
[Detail].
p Touching or switches to the next or pre-
CD:
vious page in the list.
p The “–” mark is displayed if there is no cor-
responding information.
!
!
Disc — Repeat the current disc
Track — Repeat just the current track
p If you perform track search or fast for-
ward/rewind, repeat play is automatically
canceled.
Moving to upper folders
p When playing discs with MP3/WMA/
AAC files and audio data (CD-DA), repeat
play is performed within the each data
session even if [Disc] is selected.
ROM:
When using a MP3/WMA/AAC disc in which
the data is divided into folders, you can move
a track or file to upper folders. This is used to
play back tracks or files recorded in other
folders.
!
!
!
Folder — Repeat the current folder
Disc — Repeat all tracks
Track — Repeat just the current track
%
Touch
p
.
is only displayed when the list is dis-
played.
p If the current folder is the ROOT folder,
is displayed in gray.
94
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
Using the AV Source (Built-in DVD Drive and Radio)
07
p If you select another folder during repeat
play, the repeat play range changes to
[Disc].
p If you perform fast forward/rewind during
[Track], the repeat play range changes to
[Folder].
p When [Folder] is selected, it is not possi-
ble to play back a subfolder of that folder.
p When playing discs with MP3/WMA/
AAC files and audio data (CD-DA), repeat
play is performed within the currently
playing data session even if [Disc] is se-
lected.
p If you turn [Scan] to [On] during the re-
peat play range is [Disc], the scan play is
performed only first tracks of each
folders.
Touch panel key operation (DivX)
1
Touch [DISC] in AV Source screen to se-
lect the built-in DVD drive.
If the DVD map disc is loaded or there is no
disc in navigation system, you cannot select
[DISC] (built-in DVD drive).
2 Play tracks in a random order
Touching [Random] switches between [On]
and [Off]. When using ROM, the tracks in
the current repeat play range are randomly
played.
2
Touch the screen to display the touch
panel keys.
Touch panel keys (Page 1)
2
1
p If you turn [Random] to [On] during the
repeat play range is [Track], the repeat
play range changes to [Folder] automati-
cally.
5
2
6
3 Scanning play
CD: Scan tracks of a CD
Touching [Scan] switches between [On] and
[Off]. Scan play lets you hear the first 10
seconds of each track on the CD. When you
find the desired track touch [Scan] to turn
scan play off.
7
4
3
Touch panel keys (Page 2)
p After scanning of a CD is finished, nor-
mal playback of the tracks will begin
again.
ROM: Scan folders and tracks
Touching [Scan] switches between [On] and
[Off]. Scan play is performed in the current
repeat play range. When you find the de-
sired track touch [Scan] to turn scan play
off.
p After track or folder scanning is finished,
normal playback of the tracks will begin
again.
p If you turn [Scan] to [On] during the re-
peat play range is [Track], the repeat play
range changes to [Folder] automatically.
5
7
4
3
p With some discs, the icon 9 may be dis-
played, meaning that the operation is not
valid.
1 Playback and Pause
Pause lets you temporarily stop disc play-
back. Touching f switches between
“playback” and “pause”.
p The icon e is displayed and playback is
paused letting you view a still image.
95
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
07
Using the AV Source (Built-in DVD Drive and Radio)
2 Skip the file forward or backward
Touching p skips to the start of the next
file. Touching o once skips to the start of
the current file. Touching again will skip to
the previous file.
Function menu
p You can also select a file by pressing o
or p button on the hardware.
3 Hide the touch panel keys
1
2
Touching [Hide] clears the touch panel
keys. Touch anywhere on the LCD screen,
display the touch panel keys again.
1 Repeating play
Each touch of [Repeat] changes the set-
tings as follows:
!
!
!
Folder — Repeat the current folder
Disc — Repeat all files
File — Repeat just the current file
4 Switch the display
Touching [Disp] changes the information as
follows:
Audio, SubTitle, Repeat display — Folder
name display — File name display
p If you select another folder during repeat
play, the repeat play range changes to
[Disc].
5 Move the folder up or down
Touch a or b to select the desired folder.
You cannot select a folder that does not
have a DivX file recorded in it.
p If you perform file search or fast forward/
rewind during [File], the repeat play
range changes to [Folder].
p When [Folder] is selected, it is not possi-
ble to play back a subfolder of that folder.
6 Stop playback
When you stop playback by touching g,
that location on the disc is memorized en-
abling playback from that point when you
play the disc again.
2 Setting Up the DVD/DivX Player
p To play the disc again, touch f.
Other functions (DivX)
7 Switch to other pages of touch panel
keys
Fast rewind or forward
Touching m or n to perform fast rewind or
forward. If you keep touching m or n for
five seconds, the icon m or n changes
Operation using Function menu
(DivX)
into
or
. When this happens, fast re-
wind/ fast forward continues even if you re-
lease m or n. To resume playback at a
desired point, touch f, m or n opposite
to key pushed for five seconds.
p You can also perform fast rewind/fast for-
ward by holding o or p button on the
hardware.
Frame-by-frame playback
This lets you move ahead one frame at a time
during playback.
96
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
Using the AV Source (Built-in DVD Drive and Radio)
07
%
Touch r during playback.
3
While the input number is displayed,
Each time you touch r, you move ahead one
frame.
touch [Enter].
This starts playback from the selected scene.
To return to normal playback, touch f.
p With some discs, images may be unclear
during frame-by-frame playback.
Changing audio system during
playback (Multi-audio)
With DivX featuring multi-audio recordings,
you can switch between audio systems during
playback.
Slow motion playback
This lets you slow down playback speed.
%
Keep touching r until
during playback.
The icon is displayed, forward slow motion
is displayed
%
Touch [Audio] during playback.
Each time you touch [Audio] switches be-
tween audio mode.
playback begins.
p Display indications such as Dolby D and
M ch indicate the audio system recorded
on the DivX file. Depending on the setting,
playback may not be with the same audio
system as the one indicated.
p Touching [Audio] during fast forward/fast
rewind, pause or slow motion playback re-
turns you to normal playback.
To return to normal playback, touch f.
p There is no sound during slow motion play-
back.
p With some discs, images may be unclear
during slow motion playback.
p Reverse slow motion playback is not possi-
ble.
Searching for a playback location
Changing the subtitle during
playback (Multi-subtitle)
With DivX featuring multi-subtitle recordings,
you can switch between subtitles during play-
back.
When playing back DivX, you can search for a
specific folder, file or time to begin playback.
p Time search and file search are not possi-
ble when disc playback has been stopped.
1
Touch [Search] and then touch desired
item.
p When playing DivX, touch [Folder] (folder),
%
Touch [S.Title] during playback.
Each time you touch [S.Title] switches be-
tween subtitle.
[File] (file) or [Time] (time).
p Touching [S.Title] during fast forward/fast
rewind, pause or slow motion playback re-
turns you to normal playback.
p When using DivX, you can switch between
showing or hiding the subtitles while a sub-
title file is displayed. This switches the sub-
titles while displaying subtitles in a DivX
file.
2
ber.
Touch 0 — 9 to input the desired num-
For folders and files
!
!
!
To select 3, touch 3.
To select 10, touch 1 and 0 in order.
To select 23, touch 2 and 3 in order.
For time (time search)
!
!
To select 21 minutes 43 seconds, touch 2, 1,
4 and 3 in order.
To select 1 hour 11 minutes, convert the
time into 71 minutes 00 seconds and touch
7, 1, 0 and 0 in order.
To cancel the input numbers, touch [Clear].
97
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
07
Using the AV Source (Built-in DVD Drive and Radio)
Playing DivX® VOD content
Some DivX VOD (video on demand) content
Radio
Listening to the radio
may only be playable a fixed number of times.
When you load a disc containing this type of
1
2
3
4
DivX VOD content, the remaining number of
plays is shown on-screen and you then have
the option of playing the disc (thereby using
up one of the remaining plays), or stopping. If
you load a disc that contains expired DivX
VOD content (for example, content that has
zero remaining plays), Rental expired is dis-
played.
5
6
p If your DivX VOD content allows an unlim-
ited number of plays, then you may load
the disc into your player and play the con-
tent as often as you like, and no message
will be displayed.
1
2
3
4
p In order to play DivX VOD content on this
unit, you first need to register the unit with
your DivX VOD content provider. For infor-
mation about your registration code, refer
p DivX VOD content is protected by a DRM
(Digital Rights Management) system. This
restricts playback of content to specific, re-
gistered devices.
7
These are the basic steps necessary to operate
the radio.
= For details concerning operations, refer to
1 Source icon
%
If the message is displayed after load-
ing a disc containing DivX VOD content,
touch [Play].
2 Band indicator
Playback of the DivX VOD content will start.
p Touch [Next] or [Previous] to switch be-
tween files.
p If you do not want to play the DivX VOD con-
tent, touch [Stop].
3 Preset number indicator
4 Frequency indicator
5 STEREO indicator
6 LOCAL indicator
7 Preset list or Detail information display
1
Touch [RADIO] in AV Source screen to
select the radio.
98
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
Using the AV Source (Built-in DVD Drive and Radio)
07
2
Touch [Band] to select a band.
Preset list display
Touch [Band] repeatedly until the desired
band is displayed, FM1, FM2, FM3 or AM.
3
or
To perform manual tuning, touch
briefly.
The frequencies move up or down step by
step.
4
To perform seek tuning, keep touching
or for about one second and re-
Storing and recalling broadcast
frequencies
If you touch any of the preset tuning keys P1
(PRESET 1) — P6 (PRESET 6) you can easily
store up to six broadcast frequencies for later
recall with the touch of a key.
lease.
The tuner will scan the frequencies until a
broadcast strong enough for good reception is
found.
You can cancel seek tuning by touching either
or
briefly.
If you keep touching
or
you can
skip broadcasting stations. Seek tuning starts
as soon as you release the keys.
Switching between the detail
information display and the
preset list display
Preset tuning keys (P1 — P6)
You can switch the left side of the basic screen
according to your preference.
1
When you find a frequency that you
want to store in memory, keep touching a
preset tuning key P1 — P6 until the preset
number (e.g., P.CH 1) stops flashing.
The selected radio station frequency has been
stored in memory.
%
Touch [Preset] (or [Detail]).
Each touch of [Preset] (or [Detail]) changes
the detail information display or preset list dis-
play.
p Up to 18 FM stations, 6 for each of the three
FM bands, and 6 AM stations can be stored
in memory.
Detail information display
2
The next time you touch the same pre-
set tuning key P1 — P6, the radio station
frequency is recalled from memory.
p You can also use a and b to recall radio
stations frequencies assigned to preset tun-
ing keys P1 — P6.
99
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
07
Using the AV Source (Built-in DVD Drive and Radio)
3
Touch c or d to set the sensitivity.
Advanced radio operation
There are four levels of sensitivity for FM and
two levels for AM:
FM: 1 — 2 — 3 — 4
AM: 1 — 2
p The FM “4” (AM “2”) setting allows recep-
tion of only the strongest stations, while
lower settings let you receive progressively
weaker stations.
1
1 Function display
Storing the strongest broadcast
frequencies
“BSM” (best stations memory) lets you auto-
matically store the six strongest broadcast fre-
quencies under preset tuning keys P1 — P6
and once stored there you can tune in to those
frequencies with the touch of a key.
1
Touch [BSM] in Function menu.
2
Touch [Start] to turn BSM on.
BSM begins to flash. While BSM is flashing
the six strongest broadcast frequencies will be
stored under preset tuning keys P1 — P6 in
order of their signal strength. When finished,
BSM stops flashing.
To cancel the storage process, touch [Stop].
p Storing broadcast frequencies with BSM
may replace broadcast frequencies you
have saved using P1 — P6.
Tuning in strong signals
Local seek tuning lets you tune in only those
radio stations with sufficiently strong signals
for good reception.
1
Touch [Local] in Function menu.
2
Touch [On] to turn local seek tuning on.
To turn local seek tuning off, touch [Off].
100
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
Using the AV Source (Pioneer AV Equipment)
08
When Pioneer AV equipment is connected to
the navigation system using IP-BUS, such
equipment can be operated from the naviga-
tion system.
When reading this chapter, please also refer to
the operation manual of the AV equipment
connected to the navigation system.
5 Play time indicator
6 Repeat indicator
7 Disc number list
8 File type indicator
When playing a ROM, the file type indicator
is displayed.
1
2
[AV1 Input] is set to [M-DVD].
Multi-DVD Player
Playing a disc
DVD-Video
Touch [M-DVD] in AV Source screen to
1
2
3
4
5
8
select the multi-DVD player.
3
Touch the screen to display the touch
panel keys.
4
Touch any of the keys [1 — 6] to select
the disc you want to play.
7
6
You can use the navigation system to control a
DVD player or multi-DVD player (e.g. XDV-P6),
which is sold separately. For details concern-
ing operation, refer to the DVD player’s or
multi-DVD player’s operation manual.
This section provides information on DVD op-
erations with the navigation system that differs
from operations described in the DVD player’s
or multi-DVD player’s operation manual.
p This unit does not have ITS playlist and disc
title functions.
Operations and Functions
Touch key operations and functions are basi-
cally the same as those for the built-in DVD
player. For detail, refer to following contents.
Operating a DVD-V
p Direct touch control is not available.
p When you reproduce reverse slow motion,
use DVD player’s or multi-DVD player’s re-
mote control.
p This unit cannot display the text informa-
tion recorded on a CD TEXT disc playing on
the optional DVD player.
1 Source icon
2 Disc number indicator
Shows the number of the disc currently
playing when using a multi-DVD player.
p [B.Mark], [Disp], [Search] is not displayed.
Operating a CD/ROM
3 Title/Folder number indicator
4 Chapter/Track number indicator
101
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
08
Using the AV Source (Pioneer AV Equipment)
7 Detail information display
Displays the track title, artist and album
p AAC files cannot be played in XDV-P6.
title.
p [Shuffle All], [List] or [Detail],
,
: Track title
are not displayed.
: Artist
: Album title
p The “–” mark is displayed if there is no
corresponding information.
USB
8 Repeat/Random/Scan indicator
The marks shown below indicate the current
playback status.
Operating the USB portable
audio player/USB memory
1
2
3
5
4
6
and repeat range: Displays the repeat
range
: Random
: Scan
1
Touch [USB] in AV Source screen to se-
lect the USB.
7
8
2
Touch a or b to select a folder.
You can control a USB portable audio player/
USB memory by combining the USB adapter
(e.g. CD-UB100) (sold separately) to the navi-
gation system. For details concerning opera-
tion, refer to the USB adapter’s operation
manual.
p Optimum performance of this unit may not
be obtained depending on the connected
USB portable audio player/USB memory.
p You can listen to songs by connecting a
USB portable audio player/USB memory
that is USB Mass Storage Class compliant.
For details about the supported USB mem-
ory, refer to USB adapter’s operation man-
ual.
p Playback is carried out in order of file num-
ber. Folders are skipped if they contain no
files. (If folder 001 (ROOT) contains no files,
playback commences with folder 002.)
3
To skip back or forward to another
compressed audio file, briefly touch o or
p.
4
To perform fast forward or rewind,
keep touching o or p.
Displaying text information
The operation is the same as that of the built-
in DVD drive.
p Genre and Year are not displayed.
p If the characters recorded on the audio file
are not compatible with this navigation sys-
tem, those characters will not be displayed.
1 Source icon
2 Folder number indicator
3 Track number indicator
4 Play time indicator
5 Current folder name indicator
6 File type indicator
102
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
Using the AV Source (Pioneer AV Equipment)
08
1 Function display
Switching between the detail
information display and the list
display
You can switch the left side of the basic screen
according to your preference.
Repeating play
There are three repeat play ranges for the USB
portable audio player/USB memory; All (re-
peat all files), Track (repeat one track) and
Folder (repeat folder).
%
Touch [List] (or [Detail]).
Each touch of [List] (or [Detail]) changes the
list display or detail information display.
Detail information display
%
Touch [Repeat] in Function menu.
Each touch of [Repeat] changes the settings
as follows:
!
All — Repeat all files in the USB portable
audio player/USB memory
!
!
Track — Repeat just the current track
Folder — Repeat the current folder
p If you select another folder during repeat
play, the repeat play range changes to [All].
p If you perform track search or fast forward/
rewind during [Track], the repeat play range
changes to [Folder].
List display
Playing tracks in a random order
Random play lets you play back tracks in a
random order within the repeat range, [All] or
[Folder].
1
Select the repeat range.
Viewing contents of upper folder
Touching
to display contents of the
upper folder.
p If the current folder is the ROOT folder,
2
Touch [Random] in Function menu.
Touching [Random] switches between [On]
and [Off].
is not displayed.
Tracks will play in a random order within the
previously selected [All] or [Folder].
Advanced USB operation
Scanning folders and tracks
When the repeat play range is set to [Folder],
the beginning of each track on the selected
folder plays for about 10 seconds.
When the repeat play range is set to [All], the
beginning of all tracks in USB portable audio
player/USB memory are played for about 10
seconds.
1
103
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
08
Using the AV Source (Pioneer AV Equipment)
1
2
Select the repeat range.
navigation system which differs from that de-
scribed in the XM tuner’s operation manual.
Only the logo data that is contained in the na-
vigation DVD Map Disc can be displayed for
each channel. The icon of a newly established
channel that is not contained in the disc can-
not be displayed. When no icon can be dis-
played, the following substitute icon is
displayed.
Touch [Scan] in Function menu.
Touching [Scan] switches between [On] and
[Off].
The first 10 seconds of each track of the cur-
rent folder (or the first track of each folder) is
played.
Substitute icon
3
When you find the desired track (or
folder) touch [Scan] to turn scan play off.
p After track or folder scanning is finished,
normal playback of the tracks will begin
again.
p The logo data is not displayed during the
memory navi mode.
p The following functions are not available on
the GEX-P10XMT, GEX-P920XM.
— Switching the XM display
p The following functions are not available on
the GEX-P910XM.
XM Tuner
— Using the MyMix function
— Using the direct traffic announcement
function
— Selecting a channel from the XM chan-
nel list display
Listening to XM Satellite Radio
All CH Mode
1
2
3
5
6
4
p The following functions are not available on
the GEX-P900XM.
— Using the MyMix function
— Using the direct traffic announcement
function
— Selecting a channel from the XM chan-
nel list display
7
— Selecting an XM channel directly
Category Mode
1 Source icon
2 XM band indicator
3 XM preset number indicator
4 XM channel number indicator
8
5 XM channel select mode indicator
Shows what channel select mode has been
selected. You can select a channel from all
channels in All CH Mode (or
CH Number Mode), and select a channel
from a selected category in
You can use the navigation system to control
an XM satellite digital tuner (e.g. GEX-
P10XMT), which is sold separately.
For details concerning operation, refer to the
XM tuner’s operation manuals. This section
provides information on XM operations with
Category Mode.
104
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
Using the AV Source (Pioneer AV Equipment)
08
Switching between the
detailed information display
and the preset list display
6 XM channel category or XM channel in-
formation
You can switch the left side of the basic screen
according to your preference.
7 Detailed information or preset list dis-
play
%
Touch [Preset] (or [Detail]).
Each touch of [Detail] (or [Preset]) changes
the detail information display or preset list dis-
play.
8 Category icon
1
Touch [XM] in AV Source screen to se-
Detail information display
(e.g. All CH Mode)
lect the XM.
2
Touch [Band] to select an XM band.
Touch [Band] repeatedly until the desired XM
band is displayed: XM1, XM2 or XM3.
3
To perform tuning, touch
The channels move up or down step by step. If
you keep touching or , you can in-
or
.
crease or decrease channel number continu-
ously. You can also perform manual tuning by
pressing the o or p button.
p You can also perform tuning within selected
channel category.
Preset list display
(e.g. All CH Mode)
= For details concerning operations, refer to
Switching the XM channel
select mode
You can switch modes between the two meth-
ods for selecting and listing channels.
All CH Mode (or CH Number Mode):
You can select a channel from all channels.
Category Mode:
Switching the XM display
%
Touch [Disp].
Each touch of [Disp] changes the information
as follows:
GEX-P900XM:
Channel number — Channel name — Artist
name/feature — Song/program title — Infor-
mation
You can select a channel within the selected
category.
GEX-P910XM:
%
Touch [Mode] to select the desired
Channel name — Artist name/feature —
Song/program title — Channel category
channel select mode.
Touch [Mode] repeatedly to switch between
the two modes.
105
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
08
Using the AV Source (Pioneer AV Equipment)
button to continuously move up or down
the channels in the category.
Storing and recalling broadcast
stations
If you touch any of the preset tuning keys
Preset1 (or P1) — Preset6 (or P6) you can ea-
sily store up to six broadcast stations for later
recall with the touch of a key.
Selecting a channel from the
XM channel list display
The list content can be switched so you can
search for the track you want to listen to not
only by the channel name but also by the artist
name or song title.
1
Select the channel that you want to
store in memory.
2
3
Touch [Preset] to display the preset list.
Keep touching a preset tuning key
p The channel list shows all the channels
during [All CH Mode], and the channels
included in the selected category during
[Category Mode]. To switch the channel
mode, touch [Mode].
Preset1 (or P1) — Preset6 (or P6) until the
XM preset number (e.g., P.CH 1) stops flash-
ing.
The number you have touched will flash in the
XM preset number indicator and then remain
lit. The selected station has been stored in
memory.
1
Touch [List].
The XM channel list appears in the display.
Each touch of [List] changes the settings as
follows:
The next time you touch the same preset tun-
ing key Preset1 (or P1) — Preset6 (or P6) the
station is recalled from memory.
Detail information display or Preset list
display — Ch Name List (Channel name) —
Song Title List (Song title) —
p Up to 18 stations, 6 for each of three XM
Artist Name List (Artist name)
bands can be stored in memory.
2
Touch the desired channel that you
p You can also touch
or
to recall
want to listen to.
stations assigned to preset tuning keys
Preset1 (or P1) — Preset6 (or P6) in the de-
tailed information display when the
“All CH Mode (or CH Number Mode)” is
selected.
Selecting a channel in the
channel category
Press or to switch to the next page or the
previous page.
1
Touch [Mode] to select Category Mode.
p In Category Mode, touch
or
2
Touch or to select the de-
to switch to another category.
sired category.
You can also select the category by pressing
the o or p button.
3
Touch
or
to select the de-
sired channel within the selected category.
p When using the GEX-P10XMTor GEX-
P920XM, press and hold the o or p
106
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
Using the AV Source (Pioneer AV Equipment)
08
When the memorized track is broadcast
Selecting an XM channel directly
A beep sounds, and a message is displayed.
Touch [Yes] to switch to that station and listen
to that track.
p If the memorized track is not selected in
the MyMix list, no notification will be pro-
vided even when that track is broadcast.
p Notification may not be provided depend-
ing on the situation of the Navigation Sys-
tem.
You can select an XM channel directly by en-
tering the desired channel number.
1
Touch [Direct].
2
Touch 0 — 9 to input the desired chan-
nel number.
To cancel the input numbers, touch [Clear].
3
While the input number is displayed,
touch [Enter].
The entered XM channel is selected.
p If there is slight difference between the
memorized title and the title of the track
being broadcast, no notification will be pro-
vided even though they are the same song.
4
Touch [Back].
You can return to the previous display.
Using the MyMix function
The MyMix function memorizes the song title
and artist name of the song currently being re-
ceived. When a track that matches the memor-
ized song title and artist name is being
broadcast on a station other than the one you
are listening to, you will be alerted, and you
can switch the station to listen to that song.
p A track itself is NOT downloaded BUT only
the song title and the artist name are mem-
orized.
Using the direct traffic
announcement function
You can listen to a memorized traffic channel
by directly calling it up with the TRFC touch
key.
Memorize a traffic channel
1
Tune in to a Traffic channel.
2
Touch and hold [TRFC] for two seconds
or more.
Memorizing the song title and the
artist name of a song
The song title and artist name of the song you
are listening to can be memorized.
The traffic channel will be memorized.
p The channels 000 and 001 can not be mem-
orized (although the channel 001 is the de-
fault).
%
Touch [Memo].
The song title and artist name of the song you
are listening to are memorized, and a confir-
mation message appears.
Calling up the memorized traffic channel
%
Touch [TRFC].
p You can also perform this operation by
touching [TRAFFIC] in the AV source
screen.
p Up to 12 song titles and artist names can be
memorized. Trying to save more than
12 tracks will overwrite old ones.
p You cannot memorize the song title or the
artist name when “– – – – – – – –” is dis-
played on the title information.
p You can call up a traffic channel from
sources other than XM.
p To cancel traffic announcement, touch
[TRFC Off].
p You cannot memorize the song title or the
artist name of the channel 000.
p There is a possibility the memorized title is
not displayed correctly.
107
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
08
Using the AV Source (Pioneer AV Equipment)
1
2
Touch [Memo] in Function menu.
Touch the track you want to delete and
Display the Radio ID
If you select CH: 000, the Radio ID is dis-
played.
hold it for two seconds or more.
That track will be deleted from the song title
list.
1
Touch [Direct].
2
Input [000] and then touch [Enter].
p To delete all of the memorized tracks, then
If you select another channel, display of the
[Delete All].
Radio ID is canceled.
3
A message will appear asking you to
Display of the Radio ID repeats displaying
[RADIO ID] and the ID code one after the
other.
confirm the deletion. Touch [Yes].
p You can also display the Radio ID to select
[RADIO ID] from channel category in
Category Mode.
Switching the alert setting
You can enable or disable alerts for all items at
the same time. This function is useful when
you want to turn alerts off temporarily without
changing the condition of each memorized
song.
Advanced XM tuner operation
1
2
Touch [Memo] in Function menu.
Touch [Alert On] or [Alert Off].
p Touch to toggle the selection.
1
1 Function display
Setting the notification of
memorized tracks
The list of song titles memorized for the MyMix
Function (MyMix list) is displayed. You can
change the notification setting when the track
is broadcast again. You can enable or disable
notification for each track.
1
Touch [Memo] in Function menu.
2
Touch the song title that you want to
exclude from the notification list.
The check mark is removed, and the song title
is excluded from the notification list.
Deleting the memorized tracks
You can delete each one of the memorized
tracks from the song title list.
108
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
Using the AV Source (Pioneer AV Equipment)
08
— Selecting team for game alert
SIRIUS Tuner
Listening to SIRIUS
— Displaying game information
— Using the song alert function
— Using the direct traffic announcement
function
All CH Mode
1
2
3
5
4
— Using the MyMix function
1 Source icon
2 SIRIUS band indicator
3 SIRIUS preset number indicator
4 SIRIUS channel number indicator
6
5 SIRIUS channel select mode indicator
Shows what channel select mode has been
selected. You can select a channel from all
channels in All CH Mode, and select a
channel from the selected category in
Category Mode.
Category Mode
7
6 Detailed information or preset list dis-
play
You can use the navigation system to control a
Pioneer Sirius satellite digital tuner, which is
sold separately.
7 Category icon
For details concerning operation, refer to the
SIRIUS tuner’s operation manuals. This sec-
tion provides information on SIRIUS opera-
tions with navigation system which differs
from that described in the SIRIUS tuner’s op-
eration manual.
1
Touch [SIRIUS] in AV Source screen to
select the SIRIUS tuner.
2
Touch [Band] to select a SIRIUS band.
p When you use the SiriusConnect universal
tuner (sold separately) with this Navigation
System, Pioneer SIRIUS BUS INTERFACE is
required. For details concerning operation,
refer to the owner’s manual of Pioneer SIR-
IUS BUS INTERFACE and SiriusConnect
universal tuner.
p The following function is not available if
this navigation system is connected to the
Pioneer SIRIUS BUS INTERFACE CD-SB10
and the SiriusConnect universal tuner.
— Using Instant Replay function
Touch [Band] repeatedly until the desired SIR-
IUS band is displayed, SIRIUS1, SIRIUS2 or
SIRIUS3.
3
.
To perform tuning, touch
or
The channels move up or down. Channels that
cannot currently be selected are skipped, and
the next channel is selected. If you keep touch-
ing
or
, you can increase or de-
crease channel number continuously.
You can also perform manual tuning by press-
ing the o or p button.
p The following functions are not available on
the SIR-PNR1.
109
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
08
Using the AV Source (Pioneer AV Equipment)
Preset list display
(e.g. All CH Mode)
Switching the SIRIUS channel
select mode
You can switch modes between the two meth-
ods for selecting and listing channels.
All CH Mode:
You can select a channel from all channels.
Category Mode:
You can select a channel within selected cate-
gory.
SIRIUS channel information
%
Touch [Mode] to select the desired
channel select mode.
Touch [Mode] repeatedly to switch between
the two modes.
Storing and recalling broadcast
stations
If you touch any of the preset tuning keys
Preset1 — Preset6 to easily store up to six
broadcast stations for later recall with the
touch of a key.
Switching between the
detailed information display
and the preset list display
1
Select the channel that you want to
You can switch the left side of the basic screen
according to your preference.
store in memory.
2
3
Touch [Preset] to display the preset list.
Keep touching a preset tuning key
%
Touch [Detail] (or [Preset]).
Each touch of [Detail] (or [Preset]) changes
the detail information display or preset list dis-
play.
Preset1 — Preset6 until the SIRIUS preset
number (e.g., P.CH 1) stops flashing.
The number you have touched will flash in the
SIRIUS preset number indicator and then re-
main lit. The selected station has been stored
in memory.
Detail information display
(e.g. All CH Mode)
The next time you touch the same preset tun-
ing key Preset1 — Preset6 the station is re-
called from memory.
p Up to 18 stations, 6 for each of three SIRIUS
bands can be stored in memory.
p You can also touch
or
to recall
stations assigned to preset tuning keys
Preset1 — Preset6 in the detailed informa-
tion display when the “All CH Mode” is se-
lected.
Selecting a channel in the
channel category
1
Touch [Mode] to select Category Mode.
110
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
Using the AV Source (Pioneer AV Equipment)
08
2
Touch
or
to select the de-
p A track itself is NOT downloaded BUT only
the song title and the artist name are mem-
orized.
sired category.
p You can also select the category by pressing
the o or p button.
Memorizing the song title and the
artist name of a song
3
Touch
or
to select the de-
sired channel within the selected category.
The song title and artist name of the song you
are listening to can be memorized.
Switching the display
%
Touch [Memo].
%
Touch [Disp].
The song title and artist name of the song you
are listening to are memorized, and a confir-
mation message appears.
Touching [Disp] changes the information as
follows:
Channel number — Channel name — Chan-
nel category — Artist name/feature — Song/
program title — Composer
p When using the SIR-PNR2, touch and hold
[Disp] to switch the information scroll On/
Off.
p Up to 12 song titles and artist names can be
memorized. Trying to save more than
12 tracks will overwrite old ones.
p You cannot memorize the song title or the
artist name when “– – – – – – – –” is dis-
played on the title information.
p You cannot memorize the song title or the
artist name of the channel 000.
p There is a possibility the memorized title is
not displayed correctly.
Selecting a SIRIUS channel directly
You can select a SIRIUS channel directly by
entering the desired channel number.
1
Touch [Direct].
When the memorized track is broadcast
A beep sounds, and a message is displayed.
Touch [Yes] to switch to that station and listen
to that track.
2
Touch 0 — 9 to input the desired chan-
nel number.
To cancel the input numbers, touch [Clear].
p If the memorized track is not selected in
the MyMix list, no notification will be pro-
vided even when that track is broadcast.
p Notification may not be provided depend-
ing on the situation of the Navigation Sys-
tem.
3
While the input number is displayed,
touch [Enter].
The entered SIRIUS channel is selected.
4
Touch [Back].
You can return to the previous display.
p If there is slight difference between the
memorized title and the title of the track
being broadcast, no notification will be pro-
vided even though they are the same song.
Using the MyMix function
The MyMix function memorizes the song title
and artist name of the song currently being re-
ceived. When a track that matches the memor-
ized song title and artist name is being
broadcast on a station other than the one you
are listening to, you will be alerted, and you
can switch the station to listen to that song.
111
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
08
Using the AV Source (Pioneer AV Equipment)
Using the direct traffic
announcement function
Advanced SIRIUS tuner operation
You can listen to a memorized traffic channel
by directly calling it up with the TRFC touch
key.
Memorize a traffic channel
1
Tune in to a Traffic channel.
1
2
Touch and hold [TRFC] for two seconds
1 Function display
or more.
The traffic channel will be memorized.
p The channels 000 and 001 can not be mem-
orized (although the channel 001 is the de-
fault).
Setting the notification of
memorized tracks
Display the song title list memorized for the
MyMix Function (MyMix list). You can change
the setting of the notification when the track is
broadcast again. You can enable or disable no-
tification for each track.
Calling up the memorized traffic channel
%
Touch [TRFC].
p You can also perform this operation by
touching [TRAFFIC] in the AV source
screen.
1
2
3
Touch [Memo] in Function menu.
p You can call up a traffic channel from
sources other than SIRIUS.
p To cancel traffic announcement, touch
[TRFC Off].
Touch c or d to select the desired song.
Touch [On / Off] to turn [On] the set-
ting.
p Touch [On / Off] again to turn the setting
Display the Radio ID
If you select CH: 000, the Radio ID is dis-
played.
[Off].
Deleting the memorized tracks
1
Touch [Direct].
You can delete each one of the memorized
tracks from the song title list.
2
Input [000] and then touch [Enter].
If you select another channel, display of the
Radio ID is canceled.
Display of the Radio ID repeats displaying
[RADIO ID] and the ID code one after the
other.
p You can also display the Radio ID to select
[RADIO ID] from channel category in
Category Mode.
1
Touch [Memo] in Function menu.
2
Touch [Previous] or [Next] to select the
song title that you want to delete.
3
4
Touch [Delete].
A message will appear asking you to
confirm the deletion. Touch [Yes].
112
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
Using the AV Source (Pioneer AV Equipment)
08
information and changes to the broadcast
channel.
p The Game Information function is available
when Game Alert function is turned on.
Switching the alert setting
You can enable or disable alerts for all items at
the same time. This function is useful when
you want to turn alerts off temporarily without
changing the condition of each memorized
song.
1
Touch [Game Info] in Function menu.
The game name and the broadcast channel
are displayed.
1
2
Touch [Memo] in Function menu.
2
3
Touch [Tune To].
p The game score will be updated automati-
Touch [Alert On] or [Alert Off].
p Touch to toggle the selection.
cally.
p When no game is currently being broad-
cast, [NO GAME] is displayed.
Selecting teams for Game Alert
This navigation system can alert you when
games involving your favorite sports teams are
about to start. To use this function you need to
store the teams you like to follow in advance.
Touch c or d to see if any other games
are playing.
1
Touch [Game Alert] in Function menu.
Hands-free Phoning
2
gue.
Touch c or d to select the desired lea-
Hands-free phoning with
cellular phones featuring
Bluetooth technology
3
Touch c or d to select the desired
team.
1
2
5
3
4
4
Touch [On / Off] to turn the setting
[On].
p Touch [On / Off] again to turn the setting
[Off].
Switching the Game Alert setting
You can enable or disable alerts for all items at
the same time. This function is useful when
you want to turn alerts off temporarily without
changing the condition of each memorized
team.
6
(The screen when the registered phone is con-
nected)
If you use a Bluetooth adapter (e.g. CD-
BTB200) (sold separately), you can connect a
cellular phone featuring Bluetooth wireless
technology to this unit for hands-free, wireless
calls, even while driving. For details concern-
ing operation, refer to the Bluetooth adapter’s
operation manual. This section provides brief
information on the hands-free phoning opera-
tions with this unit that slightly differs or is cut
short from the operations described in the
Bluetooth adapter’s operation manual.
1
2
Touch [Game Alert] in Function menu.
Touch [Alert On] or [Alert Off].
p Touch to toggle the selection.
Displaying Game Information
An alert will be displayed when a game with
the team you selected is about to start (or is
currently playing). You can also display game
113
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
08
Using the AV Source (Pioneer AV Equipment)
p Since this unit is always on standby to con-
About the telephone source
standby mode
Once connected via Bluetooth wireless tech-
nology, this navigation system will remain on
telephone source standby in the background
while the connection is sustained. This means
you can freely use the other functions of this
system but still be ready to receive a call.
nect with your cellular phones via Blue-
tooth wireless technology, using this unit
without running the engine can result in
battery drainage.
1 Source icon
2 Device name indicator
3 Signal level indicator
p If the signal is not available, ( ) is dis-
played.
p Depending on the cellular phones featur-
ing Bluetooth technology, this indicator
may not show on the screen.
4 Battery strength indicator
p Battery strength indicator may differ
from the actual battery strength.
p Depending on the cellular phones featur-
ing Bluetooth technology, this indicator
may not show on the screen.
Setting up for hands-free phoning
Before you can use the hands-free phoning
function you will need to set up the navigation
system for use with your cellular phone. This
entails establishing a Bluetooth wireless con-
nection between the system and your phone,
registering your phone with the system and
adjusting the volume level.
5 Missed call notice indicator
6 Preset list display
1
Connection
Your phone should already be temporarily con-
nected. However, to make best use of the func-
tions, we recommend you register the phone
to the navigation system.
p This navigation system’s phone call re-
ception is always on standby when the
ignition switch is set to ACC or ON.
p The line-of-sight distance between this
navigation system and your cellular
phone must be 10 meters or less when
sending and receiving voice and data via
Bluetooth technology. However, the
transmission distance may become
shorter than the estimated distance, de-
pending on the environment in use.
p When BT-TEL is selected as a source,
equalizer curves are automatically chan-
ged to suitable settings for the phone
source. When the source is changed or
returned to another source, equalizer set-
tings automatically return to the original
settings.
2
Registration
Register the phone to take full advantage of
the features available with Bluetooth wireless
technology.
3
Adjust the volume level
Adjust the volume on your cellular phone and
the navigation system for comfort.
p The caller’s voice volume and ring volume
may vary depending on the type of the cel-
lular phone.
p When BT-TEL is selected as a source,
functions other than FAD/BAL are inop-
erable in Sound menu.
p If the difference between the ring volume
and caller’s voice volume is large, the over-
all volume level may become unstable.
p Before disconnecting cellular phone from
this navigation system, make sure to adjust
the volume to a proper level.
114
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
Using the AV Source (Pioneer AV Equipment)
08
Making a call by entering
phone number
The most basic way to make a call is to simply
dial the number.
1
Touch [BT-TEL] in AV Source screen to
select the cellular phone source.
p The name (if registered on the phone book)
and phone number are displayed.
5
Touch
to end the call.
2
Touch [Direct].
The direct dial screen appears.
Making a call from the history list
3
Touch the number keys to enter the
The most recent calls made (dialled), received
and missed are stored in the call history list.
You can browse the call history list and call
numbers from it.
phone number.
The input phone number is displayed below
the device name.
Input number
p Up to 12 calls are stored in each list.
p The call history is stored only when the re-
gistered phone is connected to this naviga-
tion system.
1
Touch [Log].
The history list screen appears.
2
Touch [Log] to change the list.
p Each touch of [Log] changes the lists as fol-
lows:
ADD ”+”:
Adds or deletes + before the phone number.
:
Missed calls list — Dialed calls list — Re-
ceived calls list
p Touching or switches to the next or pre-
vious page in the list.
The input number is deleted letter by letter
from the end of the number. Continuing to
press deletes all of the numbers.
Set:
3
Touch the desired phone number.
p Touching [ADD ”+”] adds or deletes + be-
fore the phone number.
p Each touch of [ABC/123] changes the dis-
play on the list between the name and the
phone number.
p If the name is not registered in the phone
book [No Name] will be displayed.
p If a incoming call number is not available to
display, “–” will be appear instead of the
number.
Change to the preset dial list screen. You can
assign the input number to the preset dial list.
ESC:
Return to the previous screen.
4
Touch
to make a call.
p The estimated call time appears in the dis-
play.
p The estimated call time in the display may
differ from the actual call time.
115
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
08
Using the AV Source (Pioneer AV Equipment)
p Each touch of [ABC/123] changes the dis-
play on the list between the name and the
phone number.
4
5
Touch
to make a call.
p The estimated call time appears in the dis-
play.
p The estimated call time in the display may
differ from the actual call time.
2
3
Touch
to make a call.
p The estimated call time appears in the dis-
play.
p The estimated call time in the display may
differ from the actual call time.
Touch
to end the call.
Making a call from the preset
dial list
Touch
to end the call.
You can easily store up to 6 phone numbers
and later recall them with the touch of a preset
key.
Calling a number in the phone
book
After finding the entry in the phone book you
want to call, you can select the number and
make the call.
Registering phone numbers to the
preset dial list
p Before using this function, you need to
transfer the phone book in your cellular
phone to this navigation system.
1
Select or input a phone number you
want to assign to the preset dial list.
1
Touch [PH.Book].
The phone book list screen appears.
2
Touch and hold one of preset keys P1 to
P6 until the beep sounds.
The selected phone number is stored in mem-
ory. The next time you touch the same preset
keys, the phone number is recalled from mem-
ory.
p If a phone number other than registered in
the phone book is stored in the preset,
[No Name] will be displayed.
p If a phone book entry is edited after the
entry is stored in the preset dial list, the edit
will not be reflected to the list.
p Touching or switches to the next or pre-
vious page in the list.
p You can search the phone book entry by al-
phabet.
2
call.
Touch a phone book entry you want to
Calling a number in the preset dial list
1
Touch one of preset keys P1 to P6.
The detailed list of the selected entry appears.
The phone number registered to the selected
preset key is displayed.
p Touching [ADD ”+”] adds or deletes + be-
3
Touch a number you want to call.
p Touching [ADD ”+”] adds or deletes + be-
fore the phone number.
fore the phone number.
116
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
Using the AV Source (Pioneer AV Equipment)
08
4
5
Touch
to make a call.
Making a call via voice recognition
If your cellular phone features voice recogni-
tion technology, you can make a call by voice
commands.
p This function is available only if your cellu-
lar phone features voice recognition func-
tion.
p The estimated call time appears in the dis-
play.
p The estimated call time in the display may
differ from the actual call time.
Touch
to end the call.
p Operation varies depending on the type of
your cellular phone. For more details con-
cerning operation, refer to the instruction
manual of your cellular phone.
p This function can be operated only when
the connection is established by HFP
(Hands Free Profile).
Searching the phone book entry by
alphabet
If there are many entries in the phone book
list, it can be useful to display them in the al-
phabetical order for easier searching.
1
Touch [PH.Book].
The phone book list screen appears.
1
Touch [Voice].
Voice recognition function of the cellular
phone is now ready.
p If your cellular phone does not feature voice
recognition function, No voice dial appears
in the display and operation is not available.
2
Touch [Search].
The phone book search screen appears.
2
Pronounce the name of your contact.
For more details concerning the voice recogni-
tion operation, refer to your cellular phone’s
instruction manual.
3
Input the first letter of the entry in the
phone book list you want to search, then
touch [OK].
The phone book list screen reappears. The
search result is reflected, and the matched
entry in the phone book list is displayed.
p If no entry is found by the search,
Taking a phone call
Answering an incoming call
Even when a source other than BT-TEL is se-
lected, you can still answer an incoming call.
1
When a call comes in, touch
.
[No Data] is displayed and [OK] is inactive.
p Touching [Clear] resets the search result
and displays the original phone book list.
The characters contained in [Next] in the
phone book edit screen are treated in the
same way as other alphabets when searching.
For example, when you use such as [A], [a] or
[Å] the result to come out is the same.
The estimated call time appears in the display.
p The estimated call time in the display may
differ from the actual call time.
p You can set this navigation system to auto-
matically answering incoming calls.
2
Touch
to end the call.
p You may hear a noise when you disconnect
the phone.
p You can also perform this operation by
pressing PHONE button.
117
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
08
Using the AV Source (Pioneer AV Equipment)
Answering call waiting
Advanced hands-free phoning
operation
If a call comes in while you are talking on the
phone, the number of the new caller appears
in the display to signal that you have call wait-
ing. You can put the first caller on hold while
you answer the call waiting.
1
Touch
to answer call waiting.
switches between callers
2
Touching
1
on hold.
1 Function display
3
Touch
to end the call(s).
p When your cellular phone is not con-
nected, you cannot select
p Depending on the cellular phone that is
connected to this navigation system via
Bluetooth technology, the first caller will be
kept on hold.
p You can also answer and end call waiting
by pressing PHONE button.
[Phonebook Transfer] or
[Clear Memory].
p You can only select [Echo Cancel] while
transmitting or receiving a call, or during
conversation.
Rejecting call waiting
If you would rather not interrupt your current
call to answer call waiting, you can reject it.
Connecting a cellular phone
%
Touch
to reject call waiting.
To use a phone wirelessly with the navigation
system, it is necessary first to establish a con-
nection using Bluetooth wireless technology.
There are several ways you can do this.
p Connection is normally established by HFP
(Hands Free Profile), which gives you full
control of functions available on the tele-
phone source.
p You can also reject call waiting by pressing
and holding PHONE button.
p The number you have rejected is not added
to the call history list.
Rejecting an incoming call
You can reject an incoming call.
= If you want to set this navigation system to
automatically rejecting all incoming calls,
However, in some cases when you make
connection from your cellular phone, the
connection may be made by HSP (Head
Set Profile) and several functions may not
be available.
%
When a call comes in, touch
.
p A phone may be connected via Bluetooth
wireless technology but not yet registered
with the navigation system. In this case it is
said to be temporarily connected, and the
available features are limited. To take full
advantage of all the features available, we
recommend you register your phone with
this navigation system.
The call is rejected.
p You can also reject an incoming call by
pressing and holding PHONE button.
p The rejected call is recorded in missed call
history list.
The limited features are:
118
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
Using the AV Source (Pioneer AV Equipment)
08
— Preset dial list
— Call history list
— Phone book
Searching for available cellular phones
You can have the navigation system search for
any available phones in the area that have
Bluetooth wireless technology, then select
which one you want to connect to from a list
displayed onscreen.
p If [Auto Connect] is set to [On], cellular
phone that has already been registered is
connected automatically.
1
Touch [Phone Connect] in Function
menu.
The phone connection menu screen appears.
2
Touch [Search].
Using a cellular phone to initiate a
connection
Putting the navigation system in Connection
open mode allows you to establish a Bluetooth
wireless connection from your cellular phone.
When available cellular phones featuring
Bluetooth wireless technology are found, de-
vice names are displayed.
p While Searching, “Search” is flash in the
display.
p If the navigation system fails to find any
available cellular phones, “Phone Not
Found” is displayed.
p Touching [Phone Name] changes the list
between the device name and the BD ad-
dress.
1
Touch [Phone Connect] in Function
menu.
The phone connection menu screen appears.
3
Touch a device name you want to con-
nect.
Connection to the cellular phone starts. When
the connection is established, the device
name of the connected cellular phone is dis-
played.
p To complete the connection, you may need
to enter the PIN code (0000) on your cellu-
lar phone.
2
Touch [Connection Open].
“Pairing” is flash in the display.
3
Use a cellular phone to connect to the
navigation system.
Connection to the cellular phone starts. When
the connection is established, the device
name of the connected cellular phone is dis-
played.
Connecting to a registered cellular
phone
Once your phone is registered with the naviga-
tion system, it is a simple matter to establish a
Bluetooth wireless connection when a regis-
tered phone is within range.
p Operation varies depending on the type of
your cellular phone. Refer to the instruction
manual that came with your cellular phone
for detailed instructions.
p To complete the connection, please check
the device name (Pioneer BT unit2) and
enter the PIN code (0000) on your cellular
phone.
1
Touch [Phone Connect] in Function
menu.
The phone connection menu screen appears.
119
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
08
Using the AV Source (Pioneer AV Equipment)
2
Touch [Direct Connect].
Displaying BD (Bluetooth
Device) address
The registered phone list is displayed.
Each device featuring Bluetooth technology is
allocated a unique 48-bit device address. It
consists of a 12-digit of hexadecimal string.
This navigation system can display the BD ad-
dress of your registered cellular phone featur-
ing Bluetooth technology.
3
Touch a device name you want to con-
nect.
Connection to the cellular phone starts. When
the connection is established, the device
name of the connected cellular phone is dis-
played.
1
Touch [Phone Connect] in Function
menu.
Registering your cellular phone
The phone connection menu screen appears.
You can register a phone that is temporarily
connected to the navigation system in order to
take full advantage of the features available
with Bluetooth wireless technology. A total of
five phones can be registered: three user cellu-
lar phones and two guest phones. When regis-
tered as a user phone, all the possible
functions are available for use. When regis-
tered as a guest phone, some functions are
limited.
2
Touch [Phone Name].
The 12-digit hexadecimal string is displayed.
p Without connecting, you cannot select
[Phone Name]. Connect your cellular
phone first.
Disconnecting a cellular phone
When you are done using your phone with the
navigation system, you can close the Blue-
tooth wireless connection.
1
Touch [Phone Register] in Function
menu.
The phone register screen appears.
1
Touch [Phone Connect] in Function
1
2
3
4
5
menu.
The phone connection menu screen appears.
2
Touch [Disconnect].
After the disconnection is completed,
“No Connection” is displayed.
1 1:
User phone 1
2 2:
User phone 2
3 3:
User phone 3
4 G:
Guest phone 1
5 G:
Deleting a registered phone
If you no longer need to use a registered
phone with the navigation system, you can de-
lete it from the registration assignment to free
it for another phone.
p If a registered phone is deleted, all the
phone book entries and call history lists
correspond to the phone will be also
cleared.
Guest phone 2
2
Touch and hold [1:] — [3:] or [G:].
When the registration is completed, the device
name is displayed.
120
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
Using the AV Source (Pioneer AV Equipment)
08
p Hands-free phoning connection is discon-
1
Touch [Phone Register] in Function
nected to establish the connection for
phone book transfer. The navigation system
now ready to be transferred the phone book
from the phone.
menu.
The phone register screen appears.
2
Touch [Delete] on the right-hand side
of the device name of the cellular phone
you want to delete.
2
Use cellular phone to perform phone
book transfer.
The deletion confirmation message appears.
The phone book in the cellular phone is trans-
ferred to the navigation system. Transfer pro-
gress is displayed.
3
Touch [Yes].
The registered phone is deleted.
p When not deleting a registered phone, se-
lect [No].
Number of completed transfers
Transferring the phone book
You can transfer the numbers in a registered
user phone’s address book into the phone
book.
p If a guest phone is connected to this navi-
gation system via Bluetooth technology,
this function cannot be selected.
p With some cellular phones, it may not be
possible to transfer the entire phone book
at once. In this case, transfer addresses
one at a time from your phone book using
your cellular phone.
Completed is displayed when the phone book
transfer is finished.
p If all the phone book entries are not trans-
ferred at a time, repeat Step 2 to transfer
the phone book entries one by one.
Changing the phone book
display order
You can choose to display the phone book
sorted alphabetically by first name or family
name.
p The phone book can hold a total of 500 en-
tries;
User phone 1: 300 entries
User phone 2: 150 entries
User phone 3: 50 entries
p Each entry can hold up to 5 phone num-
bers.
p This function is available while the regis-
tered phone is connected.
p Depending on the cellular phone that is
connected to this navigation system via
Bluetooth technology, this navigation sys-
tem may not be able to display the phone
book correctly. (Some characters may be
garbled.)
p If the phone book in the cellular phone con-
tains image data, phone book may not be
correctly transferred.
%
Touch [Phonebook Name View] in
Function menu.
Touching [Phonebook Name View] switches
between [Invert] and [Original].
p If a phone book entry is edited, the display
order of first name and family name will not
be changed.
p With some cellular phones, this feature
may not be possible.
1
Touch [Phonebook Transfer] in Function
menu.
The phonebook transfer screen appears.
121
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
08
Using the AV Source (Pioneer AV Equipment)
:
Editing the phone book
The input number is deleted letter by letter
from the end of the numbers. Continuing to
press deletes all of the numbers.
You can edit the phone numbers or names re-
gistered in the phone book.
1
Touch [PH.Book].
OK:
The phone book list screen appears.
p Touching or switches to the next or pre-
vious page in the list.
The change is fixed, and the phone book edit
screen reappears.
p You can search the phone book alphabeti-
cally.
Name edit screen
You can input letters or numbers.
2
Touch a phone book entry you want to
edit.
The detailed list of the selected entry appears.
3
Touch [Edit] on the right-hand side of
the phone number or the name of the in-
formation you want to edit.
Next:
Each touch of [Next] changes the characters
that can be input as follows:
Upper case letters — lower case letters —
upper case symbols — lower case symbols
:
The input text is deleted letter by letter from
the end of the text. Continuing to press deletes
all of the text.
The phone number edit screen or the name
edit screen appears.
OK:
4
Input the text or number.
The change is fixed and the phone book edit
screen reappears.
p Each name can be input 16 characters
long.
Phone number edit screen
You can input numbers.
Clearing memory
You can clear the memory of each item that
corresponds to the connected cellular phone:
phone book, dialled/received/missed call his-
tory list and preset dials.
ADD ”+”:
1
Touch [Clear Memory] in Function
Adds or deletes + before the phone number.
menu.
The clear memory screen appears.
122
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
Using the AV Source (Pioneer AV Equipment)
08
2
Touch [Clear] on the right-hand side of
Setting the automatic rejecting
If this function is on, the navigation system
automatically rejects all incoming calls.
the item that you want to clear memory
for.
%
Touch [Refuse All Calls] in Function
menu.
Touching [Refuse All Calls] switches between
[On] and [Off].
p If both the automatic reject and automatic
answer functions are set to [On], automatic
reject is prioritized and all incoming calls
are automatically rejected.
p If the [Refuse All Calls] is set to [On], re-
jected incoming calls will not be stored in
the missed call list.
On this screen, you can select the following
items:
Phonebook:
You can clear the registered phone book.
Dialled Calls:
You can clear the dialed call history list.
Setting a ring tone
The navigation system offers to turn the ring
tone for incoming calls on or off.
p The ring tone you select for this navigation
system has no effect on the ring tone used
by your phone. If you do not want your
phone and this navigation system to ring at
the same time, we recommend you turn
the ring tone off for one or the other.
Received Calls:
You can clear the received call history list.
Missed Calls:
You can clear the missed call history list.
Preset Dials:
You can clear the registered preset dials.
p Touching [Clear] displays the confirmation
message for clearing the memory.
p Touching [Clear All] clears all the data that
correspond to the connected cellular
phone.
%
Touch [Ring Tone] in Function menu.
Touching [Ring Tone] switches between [On]
and [Off].
3
Touch [Yes].
Data on the selected item is cleared from this
navigation system’s memory.
p If you do not want to clear memory that you
Setting the automatic connection
When automatic connection is active, the na-
vigation system will automatically establish a
connection with a registered phone when it
comes into range. Using this feature will re-
lease you from all of the processes for estab-
lishing a connection.
p With some cellular phones, it may not be
possible to perform automatic connection.
p While you are operating in Function menu
of hands-free phoning, this unit does not
initiate an automatic connection to your re-
gistered phone.
have selected, touch [No].
Setting the automatic answering
If you set the automatic answering function
on, the navigation system automatically an-
swers all incoming calls.
%
Touch [Auto Answer] in Function menu.
Touching [Auto Answer] switches between
[On] and [Off].
123
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
08
Using the AV Source (Pioneer AV Equipment)
%
menu.
Touch [Auto Connect] in Function
iPod
You can control an iPod by combining the In-
terface cable for iPod (CD-I200) (sold sepa-
rately) to the navigation system. For details
concerning operation, refer to the iPod’s own-
er’s manual.
Touching [Auto Connect] switches between
[On] and [Off].
p Automatic connection is performed in the
registration number order.
Echo canceling and noise reduction
Operating the iPod
Music
When you are operating hands-free phoning
in the vehicle, you may hear an undesired
echo. This function reduces the undesired
echo and noise while you are doing hands-free
phoning, and maintains a certain sound qual-
ity.
1
%
Touch [Echo Cancel].
Touching [Echo Cancel] switches between
[On] and [Off].
2
6
5
3, 7
4
p Some functions cannot be reproduced de-
pending on the generation of the iPod.
p If the error occurs when an iPod with video
compatibilities is connected to the naviga-
tion system, the icon
is displayed.
p o and p buttons on the hardware are
the same function as o and p in the
screen.
1 Source icon
2 Track number indicator
3 Play time indicator
4 Chapter indicator
When the source with chapters played, the
indicator appears.
5 Repeat/Shuffle indicator
The marks shown below indicate the current
playback status.
: All-tracks repeat
: One-track repeat
124
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
Using the AV Source (Pioneer AV Equipment)
08
: Shuffle
1
Touch one of the categories in which
you want to search for a song.
6 Song title, Artist name and Album title
indicator
Displays the song title, artist name and
album title.
: Song title
!
!
!
!
!
Playlists (playlists)
Genres (genres)
Artists (artists)
Albums (albums)
Podcasts (podcasts)
: Artist name
: Album title
7 Play time bar
Touch panel key operation (MUSIC)
1
tem.
Connect the iPod to the navigation sys-
The search screen is displayed.
p When connected to an iPod that can han-
dle podcasts, you can search by podcast.
p When you select Artists, Albums, or
Genres keep touching one of the list in the
category makes the songs in the list as a
playlist and start playing.
2
Touch [iPod] in AV Source screen to se-
lect the iPod.
3
Touch f.
Play of the current track pauses.
p To resume playback at the same point that
2
3
Touch the item you want to refine.
p Refine the item until the track title is dis-
played on the list.
you turned pause on, touch f again.
4
To skip backward or forward to another
From the track list, touch the track you
track, touch o or p.
want to play.
Touching p skips to the start of the next
track. Touching o once skips to the start of
the current track. Touching again will skip to
the previous track.
When the track with chapters played, touching
p skips to the start of the next chapter.
Touching o once skips to the start of the
current chapter. Touching again will skip to
the previous chapter.
p To go to the next track list, touch
p To return to the previous track list, touch
p When iPod operation screen appears after
selecting a song, touch [MENU] to display
the previous playlist.
.
.
Performing random play with
one touch
All of the selected songs can be played at ran-
dom by only touching one key.
5
To perform fast backward or forward,
keep touching o or p.
%
Touch [Shuffle All].
To cancel the random play, switch [Shuffle] to
Browsing for a song
[Off] in Function menu.
The operations of this navigation system for
controlling an iPod are designed to imitate
iPod operation. This allows you to search and
play songs as you would with an iPod.
125
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
08
Using the AV Source (Pioneer AV Equipment)
5
To skip back or forward to another
Touch panel key operation (VIDEO)
video, touch o or p.
This navigation system can play video if an
iPod with video capabilities is connected.
p Change the video setting on the iPod so
that the iPod can output the video to an ex-
ternal device, before you display the video
screen.
Touching p skips to the start of the next
video. Touching o once skips to the start of
the current video. Touching again will skip to
the previous video.
When the video with chapters played, touch-
ing p skips to the start of the next chapter.
Touching o once skips to the start of the
current chapter. Touching again will skip to
the previous chapter.
p For details concerning setting and opera-
tion, refer to the iPod’s owner’s manual.
1
Touch [VIDEO].
Touch [MUSIC] in step 2 to return to the music
operation screen.
6
To perform fast rewind or forward,
keep touching o or p.
If you keep touching o or p for five sec-
onds, fast rewind/ fast forward continues even
if you release o or p. To resume playback
at a desired point, touch f, o or p.
2
Touch one of the categories in that con-
tains the video you want to play.
Advanced iPod operation
3
Touch the screen to display to touch
panel keys.
1
1 Function display
p To return to the category selection screen,
touch [Top Menu].
Repeating play
There are two repeat play types for the iPod:
One (one-track repeat) and All (all-tracks re-
peat).
p When iPod operation screen appears after
selecting a video, touch [MENU] to display
the previous playlist.
%
Touch [Repeat] in Function menu.
4
Touch f.
Each touch of [Repeat] changes the settings
Play of the current video pauses.
as follows:
p To resume playback at the same point that
!
!
One — Repeat just the current track
All — Repeat all tracks in the selected list
you turned pause on, touch f again.
126
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
Using the AV Source (Pioneer AV Equipment)
08
Shuffle play
This function shuffles tracks or albums and
plays them in random order.
Bluetooth Audio
Listening to songs on BT Audio
(Bluetooth audio player)
%
Touch [Shuffle] in Function menu.
1
2
Each touch of [Shuffle] changes the settings
as follows:
!
!
!
Off — Does not shuffle.
Songs — Shuffles tracks.
Albums — Shuffles albums.
p When you set [Albums], the albums are
shuffled but the tracks in the album will not
be shuffled. (The tracks in the album will be
played from the first track.)
If you connect a Bluetooth adapter (e.g. CD-
BTB200) (sold separately) to this unit, you can
control a Bluetooth audio player via Bluetooth
wireless technology. For details concerning
operation, refer to the Bluetooth adapter’s op-
eration manual. This section provides brief in-
formation on Bluetooth audio player
operations with this unit that slightly differs or
is cut short from the operations described in
the Bluetooth adapter’s operation manual.
p Even if your audio player does not contain
a Bluetooth module, you can still control it
from this unit via Bluetooth wireless tech-
nology. To control your audio player by
using this unit, connect a product featuring
Bluetooth wireless technology (available on
the market) to your audio player and con-
nect Bluetooth adapter (e.g. CD-BTB200) to
this unit.
Wide Screen
If the video is compatible with wide screen for-
mat, set [Wide Screen] setting to [On] in
order to view the video image in wide screen.
%
Touch [Wide Screen] in Function menu.
Touching [Wide Screen] switches between
[On] or [Off].
p When you select the video after setting
[Wide Screen], display size is changed.
Turning on or off charging for
the iPod
The iPod charging setting can be turned on or
off. If the video from an iPod with video cap-
abilities seems fuzzy, turning off the charging
setting may improve the video quality.
p Depending on the Bluetooth audio player
connected to this navigation system, the
available operations with this navigation
system are limited to the following two le-
vels:
%
Touch [iPod Charge] in Function menu.
Touching [iPod Charge] switches between
[On] or [Off].
— Lower level: Only playing back songs on
your audio player is possible.
— Higher level: Playing back, pausing, se-
lecting songs, etc., are possible (all the
operations illustrated in this manual).
127
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
08
Using the AV Source (Pioneer AV Equipment)
a Bluetooth wireless connection. (Refer to
p Since there are a number of Bluetooth
audio players available on the market, op-
erations with your Bluetooth audio player
using this navigation system vary greatly in
range. Please refer to the instruction man-
ual that came with your Bluetooth audio
player as well as this manual while operat-
ing your player on this navigation system.
p Information about songs (e.g. the elapsed
playing time, song title, song index, etc.)
cannot be displayed on this navigation sys-
tem.
p While you are listening to songs on your
Bluetooth audio player, please refrain from
operating your cellular phone as much as
possible. If you try operating on your cellu-
lar phone, the signal from your cellular
phone may cause a noise on the song play-
back.
p When you are talking on the cellular phone
connected to this navigation system via
Bluetooth wireless technology, the song
playback from your Bluetooth audio player
connected to this navigation system is
muted.
p Even if you switch to another source while
listening to a song on your Bluetooth audio
player, the playback of song continues to
elapse.
2
Touch d.
Playback starts.
3
To skip back or forward to another
track, touch o or p.
Touching p skips to the start of the next
track. Touching o once skips to the start of
the current track. Touching it again will skip to
the previous track.
4
To perform fast forward or reverse,
keep touching o or p.
5
To stop playback, touch g.
Pausing track playback
Pause lets you temporarily stop track play-
back.
%
Touch e.
Play of the current track pauses.
p To resume playback at the same point that
you turned pause on, touch e again.
Advanced BT-Audio operation
p Depending on the Bluetooth audio player
you connected to this navigation system,
operations on this navigation system to
control the player may differ from those ex-
plained in this manual.
1 Source icon
2 Device name
1
Touching [Name] switches between equip-
ment name and BD address.
1 Function display
1
Touch [BT-AUDIO] in AV Source screen
to select the Bluetooth audio source.
p For this navigation system to control your
Bluetooth audio player it needs to establish
128
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
Using the AV Source (Pioneer AV Equipment)
08
Connecting a Bluetooth audio
player
External Unit
Operating the external unit
%
Touch [Connection Open] in Function
1
2
menu to turn the connection open on.
Pairing is displayed. This navigation system is
now on standby for connection from Bluetooth
audio player.
If your Bluetooth audio player is set ready for
Bluetooth wireless connection, the connection
to this navigation system will be automatically
established.
p Before you can use audio players you may
need to enter the PIN code into this naviga-
tion system. If your player requires a PIN
code to establish a connection, look for the
code on the player or in its accompanying
documentation. Enter the PIN code refer-
ring to page 119.
The term “external unit” refers to a Pioneer
product (such as one available in the future)
that, although incompatible as a source, en-
ables control of basic functions by the naviga-
tion system. Two external units can be
controlled by the navigation system. When
two external units are connected, the naviga-
tion system allocates them to external unit 1
or external unit 2.
For details concerning operation, refer to the
external unit’s operation manual. This section
provides information on external unit opera-
tions with the navigation system that differ
from those described in the external unit’s op-
eration manual.
Disconnecting a Bluetooth
audio player
%
Touch [Disconnect] in Function menu.
After the disconnection is completed,
No Connection is displayed.
p Operation varies depending on the external
unit connected. (In some cases, the exter-
nal unit may not respond.)
Displaying BD (Bluetooth
Device) address
%
Touch [Device Info] in Function menu to
1 Source icon
display the BD address.
2 External unit indicator
Various information regarding the Bluetooth
wireless technology are displayed.
1
Touch [EXT-1] or [EXT-2] in AV Source
!
!
!
!
BD ADDRESS (system address)
SYSTEM NAME (system name)
SYSTEM VER. (version)
BT MODULE VER. (Bluetooth module
version)
screen to select the external unit.
2
Touch any touch panel key to operate
the external unit.
129
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
08
Using the AV Source (Pioneer AV Equipment)
Operate the external unit by
using 1 KEY — 6 KEY
The external unit can be operated by transmit-
ting the operating commands set to 1 KEY —
6 KEY.
p Operation varies depending on the external
unit connected. (In some cases, the exter-
nal unit may not respond.)
AV Input (AV)
CAUTION
For safety reasons, video images cannot be
viewed while your vehicle is in motion. To view
video images, you must stop in a safe place and
apply the parking brake (refer to Parking brake in-
%
Touch desired key ([1 KEY] — [6 KEY])
Selecting AV as the source
to operate the external unit.
%
Touch [AV-1] or [AV-2] in the AV Source
screen.
Operate the external unit by
using F1 — F4
p If you want to switch AV source, select
[Video] in [AV1 Input] or [AV2 Input].
The external unit can be operated by transmit-
ting the operating commands set to F1 — F4.
p The operating commands set to F1 — F4
vary depending on the external unit.
p Some functions may not be used until you
touch and hold the key.
%
Touch [F1] — [F4].
The operation command is transmitted to the
external unit.
Switching the automatic and
manual function
You can turn automatic and manual function
on or off.
You can switch between Auto and Manual
functions of the external unit connected.
Initially, this function is set to Auto.
p Operating commands set for Auto and
Manual operations vary depending on the
external unit connected.
%
Touch [A/M].
Touching [A/M] switches between [Auto] and
[Manual].
130
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
Customizing the AV Source Setting
09
Various settings are available with the audio
Equalizer curve
source according to your audiovisual requests.
This chapter describes the methods of chan-
ging the various settings and how to set of the
LCD panel.
S.Bass
S.Bass is a curve in which only low-pitched sound is
boosted.
Powerful
Powerful is a curve in which low-pitched and high-
pitched sounds are boosted.
Audio Adjustments
Introduction to audio adjustments
Natural
Natural is a curve in which low-pitched and high-
pitched sounds are slightly boosted.
Vocal
Vocal is a curve in which the midrange, which is the
human vocal range, is boosted.
Flat
Flat is a flat curve in which nothing is boosted.
Custom1
Custom1 is an adjusted equalizer curve that you cre-
ate.
1
Custom2
1 Sound display
Custom2 is an adjusted equalizer curve that you cre-
ate.
p Only when the subwoofer controller set-
ting is [Preout] [Full], [Non Fading] will
be displayed instead of [Sub Woofer].
1
Touch [EQ Menu] in Sound menu.
2
Select the desired equalizer curve.
p [Custom1] and [Custom2] are adjusted
equalizer curves.
p When [Flat] is selected, no supplement or
correction is made to the sound. This is
useful to check the effect of the equalizer
curves by switching alternatively between
[Flat] and a set equalizer curve.
p When selecting the FM tuner as the
source, you cannot switch to [SLA].
Using the equalizer
The equalizer lets you adjust the equalization
to match vehicle interior acoustic characteris-
tics as desired.
Using balance adjustment
You can select a fader/balance setting that
provides an ideal listening environment in all
occupied seats.
Recalling equalizer curves
There are seven stored equalizer curves which
you can easily recall at any time. Here is a list
of the equalizer curves:
1
Touch [FAD/BAL] in Sound menu.
When the rear output setting is [Rear SP]
[Sub. W], [Balance] will be displayed instead
of [FAD/BAL].
131
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
09
Customizing the AV Source Setting
2
Touch a or b to adjust front/rear
!
!
Level:
speaker balance.
You can select the decibel (dB) level of the
selected EQ.
Q:
You can select the details of the curve char-
acteristics.
Each time you touch a or b moves the front/
rear speaker balance towards the front or the
rear.
Front:15 to Rear:15 is displayed as the front/
rear speaker balance moves from front to rear.
Both Front:0 and Rear:0 are the proper set-
ting when only two speakers are used.
When the rear output setting is Rear SP
Sub. W, you cannot adjust front/rear speaker
balance.
1
2
3
Touch [EQ Menu] in Sound menu.
Touch [Customize].
Touch c or d to select the equalizer
band to adjust.
Each time you touch c or d selects equalizer
bands in the following order:
Low — Mid — High
3
Touch c or d to adjust left/right speak-
er balance.
4
Touch c or d to select the desired fre-
Each time you touch c or d moves the left/
right speaker balance towards the left or the
right.
Left:9 to Right:9 is displayed as the left/right
speaker balance moves from left to right.
quency.
Touch c or d until the desired frequency ap-
pears in the display.
Low: 40 — 80 — 100 — 160 (Hz)
Mid: 200 — 500 — 1K — 2K (Hz)
High: 3.15K — 8K — 10K — 12.5K (Hz)
Adjusting equalizer curves
5
Touch c or d to adjust the level of the
equalizer band.
You can adjust the currently selected equalizer
curve setting as desired. Adjusted equalizer
curve settings are memorized in Custom1.
p If you make Custom2 adjustments,
Custom2 curve is updated.
Each time you touch c or d increases or de-
creases the level of the equalization band. +12
to -12 is displayed as the level is increased or
decreased.
p You can adjust the center frequency, level
and the Q factor (curve characteristics) of
each currently selected curve band (Low/
Mid/High).
6
Touch c or d to select the desired Q
factor.
Touch c or d until the desired Q factor ap-
pears in the display.
Wide2 — Wide1 — Narrow1 — Narrow2
p If you make adjustments, Custom1 curve is
updated.
Setting the simulated sound stage
You can select the desired effect from various
simulated sound stage, such as Music Studio
or Dynamic Theater. You can also adjust a lis-
tener positioning effect.
!
!
Band:
You can select the equalizer band.
Frequency:
You can select which frequency to be set as
the center frequency.
132
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
Customizing the AV Source Setting
09
1
Touch [Sub Woofer] in Sound menu.
Setting a stage that fits your image
When [Preout] (the subwoofer controller set-
ting in Initial menu) is [Sub. W], you can se-
lect [Sub Woofer].
1
Touch [Staging] in Sound menu.
2
Touch the desired stage setting.
p The [Living Room] setting that emphasizes
midrange sound hardly has any effect near
the maximum volume level.
p When you set staging other than [Off], the
high pass filter (HPF) setting turns [Off].
2
Touch [On] to turn subwoofer output
on.
To turn subwoofer output off, touch [Off].
3
Touch [Reverse] or [Normal] to select
the phase of subwoofer output.
Adjusting a position effect
You can select a listener position that you
want to make as the center of sound effects.
4
Touch [+] or [-] to adjust the output
level of the subwoofer.
+6 to -6 is displayed as the level is increased
or decreased.
1
2
3
Touch [Staging] in Sound menu.
Touch [Position].
5
Touch c or d to select cut-off fre-
quency.
Touch the desired position.
Each time you touch c or d selects cut-off fre-
quencies in the following order:
50 — 80 — 125 (Hz)
Only frequencies lower than those in the se-
lected range are output from the subwoofer.
Adjusting loudness
Loudness compensates for deficiencies in the
low- and high-sound ranges at low volume.
1
Touch [Loudness] in Sound menu.
Using non fading output
When the non fading output setting is on, the
audio signal does not pass through navigation
system’s low pass filter (for the subwoofer),
but is output through the RCA output.
2
Touch [On] to turn loudness on.
To turn loudness off, touch [Off].
Touch c or d to select a desired level.
3
Each time you touch c or d selects level in
the following order:
Low — Mid — High
1
Touch [Non Fading] in Sound menu.
Only when [Preout] (the subwoofer controller
setting in Initial menu) is [Full], you can select
[Non Fading].
Using subwoofer output
This navigation system is equipped with a sub-
woofer output which can be turned on or off.
p When the subwoofer output is on, you can
adjust the cut-off frequency, the output
level and the phase of the subwoofer.
2
Touch [On] to turn non fading output
on.
To turn non fading output off, touch [Off].
3
Touch [+] or [-] to adjust the output
level of the non fading.
+6 to -6 is displayed as the level is increased
or decreased.
133
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
09
Customizing the AV Source Setting
Using the high pass filter
Setting Up the DVD/DivX
Player
When you do not want low sounds from the
subwoofer output frequency range to play
from the front or rear speakers, turn HPF (high
pass filter) on. Only frequencies higher than
those in the selected range are output from
the front or rear speakers.
Configure the DVD/DivX player.
DVD/DivX Setup adjustments
1
Touch [HPF] in Sound menu.
2
Touch [On] to turn high pass filter on.
To turn high pass filter off, touch [Off].
3
Touch c or d to select cut-off fre-
quency.
1
Each time you touch c or d selects cut-off fre-
quencies in the following order:
50 — 80 — 125 (Hz)
When [Preout] (the subwoofer controller set-
ting in Initial menu) is [Sub. W], HPF function
is effective for front speakers only.
1 DVD/DivX setup menu display
1
Play the disc that contains DVD-Video
or DivX.
2
Press MENU button to change to AV
MENU.
Adjusting source levels
3
4
5
Touch [Function].
SLA (source level adjustment) lets you adjust
the volume level of each source to prevent ra-
dical changes in volume when switching be-
tween sources.
Touch [DVD/DivX Setup].
Touch the desired function.
p Settings are based on the FM tuner volume
level, which remains unchanged.
Setting the language
You can set a desired subtitle, audio and
menu language. If the selected language is re-
corded on the disc, subtitles, audio and menu
are displayed in that language.
1
Compare the FM tuner volume level
with the level of the source you wish to ad-
just.
2
3
Touch [SLA] in Sound menu.
1
Touch [Language] and then touch
Touch [+] or [-] to adjust the source vo-
[Subtitle Language], [Audio Language] or
[Menu Language].
lume.
+4 to -4 is displayed as the source volume is
increased or decreased.
Each language menu is displayed and the cur-
rently set language is selected.
Sources are set to same source level adjust-
ment volume automatically.
2
Touch the desired language.
When you select [Others], a language code
input display is shown. Input the four digit
code of the desired language then touch
[Enter].
!
!
!
!
CD, ROM, DivX, S-DVD and M-DVD
EXT-1 and EXT-2
AV-1 and AV-2
XM and SIRIUS
134
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
Customizing the AV Source Setting
09
p When using a regular display, select either
Letter Box or Panscan. Selecting 16:9 may
result in an unnatural picture.
p If you select the TV aspect, navigation sys-
tem’s display changes to the same setting.
p If the selected language is not recorded on
the disc, the default language specified on
the disc is output and displayed.
p You can also switch the subtitle and audio
language by touching [S.Title] or [Audio]
during playback.
p Even if you use [S.Title] or [Audio] to
switch the subtitle or audio language, this
does not affect the settings here.
%
Touch [TV Aspect].
Each touch of [TV Aspect] changes the set-
tings as follows:
!
!
16:9 — Wide screen picture (16:9) is dis-
played as it is (initial setting)
Letter Box — The picture is in the shape of
a letter box with black bands at the top and
bottom of the screen
!
Panscan — The picture is cut short at the
right and left of the screen
p When playing discs that do not specify
Panscan, playback is with Letter Box even
if you select Panscan setting. Confirm
whether the disc package bears the
Setting assist subtitles on or off
16 : 9 LB
mark. (Refer to What the Marks on
Assist subtitles offer explanations for the au-
rally impaired. However, they are only dis-
played if they are recorded on the DVD.
You can turn assist subtitles on or off as de-
sired.
p Some discs do not enable changing of the
TV aspect. For details, refer to the disc’s in-
structions.
%
Touch [Assist Subtitle].
Setting the parental lock
Touching [Assist Subtitle] switches between
[On] and [Off].
Some DVD-Video discs let you use parental
lock to restrict the viewing of violent and adult
oriented scenes by children. You can set the
parental lock level in steps as desired.
p When you set a parental lock level and then
play a disc featuring parental lock, code
number input indications may be dis-
Setting angle icon display
You can set to display the angle icon on
scenes where the angle can be switched.
%
Touch [Multi Angle].
played. In this case, playback will begin
when the correct code number is input.
Touching [Multi Angle] switches between
[On] and [Off].
Setting the code number and level
Setting the aspect ratio
When you first use this function, register your
code number. If you do not register a code
number, parental lock will not operate.
There are two kinds of display. A wide screen
display has a width-to-height ratio (TV aspect)
of 16:9, while a regular display has a TV aspect
of 4:3. Be sure to select the correct TV aspect
for the display connected to REAR OUT
(VIDEO OUT).
1
2
Touch [Parental].
Touch [Parental].
135
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
09
Customizing the AV Source Setting
3
Touch [0] — [9] to input a four digit
%
Touch [DivX VOD].
code number.
Your 8-digit registration code is displayed.
p Make a note of the code as you will need it
when you register with a DivX VOD provider.
4
While the input number is displayed,
touch [Enter].
The code number is registered, and you can
now set the level.
Setting the Auto Play
When a DVD disc with DVD menu is inserted,
this unit will cancel the DVD menu automati-
cally and start playback from the first chapter
of the first title.
p This function is available for DVD-Video.
p Some DVDs may not operate properly. If
this function is not fully operated, turn this
function off and start playback.
5
Touch any of [1] — [8] to select the de-
sired level.
The parental lock level is set.
!
!
Level 8 — Playback of the entire disc is
possible (initial setting)
Level 7 — Level 2 — Playback of discs for
children and non-adult oriented discs is
possible
!
Level 1 — Playback of discs for children
only is possible
%
Touch [Auto Play].
Touching [Auto Play] switches between [On]
and [Off].
p If you want to change the parental level,
enter the registered code number in the
Step 2.
p When Auto Play is [On], you cannot oper-
ate repeating play of DVD disc.
p We recommend to keep a record of your
code number in case you forget it.
p The parental lock level is recorded on the
disc. You can confirm it by looking at the
disc package, included literature or on the
disc itself. With discs that do not feature a
recorded parental lock level, you cannot
use parental lock.
p With some discs, parental lock operates to
skip certain scenes only, after which normal
playback resumes. For details, refer to the
disc’s instructions.
Setting the Subtitle File
You can select whether to display DivX exter-
nal subtitles or not.
p The DivX subtitles will be displayed even
when [On] is selected if no DivX external
subtitle files exist.
p If you forget the registered code number,
touch [Clear] 10 times on the screen in the
Step 2. The registered code number is can-
celed, letting you register a new one.
%
Touch [Subtitle File].
Touching [Subtitle File] switches between
[On] and [Off].
p Up to 42 characters can be displayed on
one line. If more than 42 characters are set,
the line breaks and the characters are dis-
played on the next line.
p Up to 126 characters can be displayed on
one screen. If more than 126 characters are
set, the excess characters will not be dis-
played.
Displaying your DivX® VOD
registration code
In order to play DivX VOD (video on demand)
content on this navigation system, you first
need to register the unit with your DivX VOD
content provider. You do this by generating a
DivX VOD registration code, which you submit
to your provider.
136
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
Customizing the AV Source Setting
09
p The DivX subtitles will be displayed even
when the subtitle file setting is on if no cor-
responding subtitle files exist.
p Up to three lines can be displayed at
once.
Rear SP Full is selected), you can connect the
RCA subwoofer output to a subwoofer. In this
case, you can select whether to use the sub-
woofer controller’s (low pass filter, phase)
built-in Preout Sub. W or the auxiliary
Preout Full.
p When 5.1CH setting is [On], the rear out-
put and subwoofer setting is not available.
Initial Settings
1
Touch [Rear SP] in Initial menu.
Adjusting initial settings
2
Touch [Rear SP] to switch the rear out-
put setting.
When no subwoofer is connected to the rear
output, select Full.
When a subwoofer is connected to the rear
output, select Sub. W.
p When the rear output setting is Sub. W,
you cannot change the subwoofer control-
ler.
1
Initial settings lets you perform initial set up of
different settings for navigation system.
3
Touch [Preout] to switch the subwoofer
1 Function display
output or non fading output.
p Even if you change this setting, there is no
output unless you turn [Non Fading] or
[Sub Woofer] in Sound menu [On].
1
Touch [Off] in AV Source screen to turn
source off.
2
Press MENU button to change to AV
MENU.
p If you change the subwoofer controller
(Rear SP), the subwoofer output
(Sub Woofer) and non fading output
(Non Fading) in Sound menu return to the
factory settings.
p Both rear speaker leads output and RCA
rear output are switched simultaneously in
this setting.
3
Touch [Initial].
Setting the rear output and
subwoofer controller
This navigation system’s rear output (rear
speaker leads output and RCA rear output)
can be used for full-range speaker
(Rear SP Full) or subwoofer (Rear SP Sub. W)
connection. If you switch the rear output set-
ting to Rear SP Sub. W, you can connect a
rear speaker lead directly to a subwoofer with-
out using an auxiliary amp. Initially, the navi-
gation system is set for rear full-range speaker
connection (Rear SP Full). When rear output is
connected to full-range speakers (when
Editing the PIN code
You can edit the PIN code you like. Use this
function when you need to change the PIN
code from the default setting.
1
Touch [PIN Edit] in Initial menu.
137
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
09
Customizing the AV Source Setting
or muted. Use [Volume] to control the navi-
2
Touch number key to enter the new PIN
gation voice guidance volume.
code.
Bluetooth Device (BD) address
PIN code
Switching 5.1CH setting
When the navigation system is combined with
the multi-channel processor system (e.g. DEQ-
P8000 and AXM-P8000) (sold separately), you
can use the multi-channel sound.
Enter the following setting when combining
the multi-channel processor system.
Version of the Bluetooth module
System (microprocessor) version
CAUTION
DO NOT enter this setting before you connect the
multi-channel processor system. (If this setting is
entered, the RCA (“SUBWOOFER OUTPUTor
NON-FADING OUTPUT”) will output maximum vo-
lume for the multi-channel processor system.)
Pioneer is not responsible for any damage to the
speaker equipment caused by ignoring this warn-
ing.
3
Touch [Enter] to fix the new PIN code.
p The default setting of the PIN code is 0000.
Switching the sound muting/
attenuation
Sound from this system is muted, attenuated
or mixed automatically in the following cases:
!
When a call is made or received using a
cellular phone connected to navigation sys-
tem.
p This setting is possible only when the opti-
cal cable connection box (supplied with the
Multi-channel processor) is connected to
the navigation system.
!
When the voice guidance is output.
p The sound muting/attenuation function
does not work when you use a cellular
phone connected to the navigation system
via the Bluetooth adapter, which is sold se-
parately.
%
Touch [5.1CH] in Initial menu.
If you touch [5.1CH], it will be turned [On]. If
you touch [5.1CH] again to turn [Off].
p When 5.1CH setting is [On], the sound
muting/attenuation setting is not available.
Other Functions
Selecting the video for “Rear
display”
You can choose either to show the same
image as the front screen or to show the se-
lected source on the “Rear display”.
%
Touch [Mute Input/Guide] in Initial
menu.
Each touch of [Mute Input/Guide] changes
the settings as follows:
!
!
!
Mute — Muting
ATT — Attenuation
Normal — Volume does not change
p Operation returns to normal when the
phone connection (the mute signal on the
yellow/black lead) is ended or when the na-
vigation guidance is ended.
p Even when you receive a phone call, naviga-
tion voice guidance cannot be attenuated
138
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
Customizing the AV Source Setting
09
1
Press AV button to switch AV operation
Setup adjustments
screen.
2
Press MENU button and then touch
[REAR SCREEN].
Each touch of [REAR SCREEN] changes the
settings as follows:
!
Mirror — The video on the front screen of
the navigation unit is output to the “Rear
display”
1
!
!
!
DVD — The video and sound of the DVDs
are output to the “Rear display”
AV1 — The video and sound of AV-1 are
output to the “Rear display”
AV2 — The video and sound of AV-2 are
output to the “Rear display”
1 System menu display
Setting the video input
p When [Mirror] is selected, the following re-
strictions are applied to “Rear display”.
— When selecting [Rear View] in the map
display, nothing is displayed.
You can switch the setting according to the
connected component.
p Select [Video] to watch video of a con-
nected component as AV-1 or AV-2
source.
— All sounds cannot be output for “Rear
display”.
%
Touch [AV1 Input] or [AV2 Input] in
— The map screen navigation images out-
put to the “Rear display” differ from
standard NTSC format images. There-
fore, their quality will be inferior to the
images that appear on the front screen.
p When [DVD] is selected, the following re-
strictions are applied to “Rear display”.
— When a CD or MP3/WMA/AAC disc is
set in the built-in DVD drive, nothing is
output.
System menu.
Each touch of [AV1 Input] or [AV2 Input]
changes the settings as follows:
AV1 Input:
!
!
!
Off — No video component is connected
Video — External video component
EXT — Pioneer external unit connected
with RCA video cable
M-DVD — DVD player or Multi-DVD player
connected with IP-BUS cable
!
p When [AV1] or [AV2] is selected, the follow-
ing restrictions are applied to “Rear dis-
play”.
p When a DVD player or Multi-DVD player is
connected with IP-BUS cable and RCA
video cable, select [M-DVD]. When the AV
source is [M-DVD], the “Video image” of
the DVD player or Multi-DVD player can be
displayed.
— The “Video image” and sound are output
only when AV-1/AV-2 has both video
and sound.
— The “Video image” and sound are output
only when the appropriate setting on
[AV1 Input] or [AV2 Input].
AV2 Input:
!
!
Off — No video component is connected
Video — External video component
p When a Pioneer external unit is connected
with an IP-BUS cable, select [EXT]. When
the AV source is [EXT], the “Video image” of
the Pioneer external unit can be displayed.
139
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
09
Customizing the AV Source Setting
p Use AV2 Input when connecting CD-RM10
(sold separately) through the external video
component.
2
Touch [Camera] to turn rear view cam-
era setting on.
Touching [Camera] switches between [On]
and [Off].
p Unless this setting is [On], you cannot
Setting for rear view camera
switch to Rear View mode.
The following two functions are available. The
rear view camera feature requires a separately
sold rear view camera (e.g. ND-BC2). (For de-
tails, consult your dealer.)
3
Touch [Polarity] to select an appropriate
setting for polarity.
Each time you touch [Polarity] switches be-
tween the following polarity:
Camera for backing up
!
Battery — When the polarity of the con-
nected lead is positive while the shift lever
is in the REVERSE (R) position
GND — When the polarity of the connected
lead is negative while the shift lever is in
the REVERSE (R) position
The navigation system features a function that
automatically switches to the full-screen rear
camera image installed on your vehicle. When
the shift lever is in the REVERSE (R) position,
the screen automatically switches to full-
screen rear view camera.
!
Camera for Rear view mode
Switching the auto antenna
setting
If the blue lead of the navigation system is
connected to the auto antenna of the vehicle,
select either of the following settings:
[Rear View] can be displayed at all times (e.g.
when monitoring an attached trailer, etc.) as a
split screen where map information is partially
displayed. Please be aware that in this setting,
camera image is not resized to fit, and that a
portion of what is seen by the camera is not
viewable.
!
Radio — Extends the antenna only for the
Radio source. The antenna is stored when
the source is switched to another source.
Power — Extends the antenna when the
ignition switch is turned on. The antenna is
stored when the ignition switch is turned
off.
!
CAUTION
Pioneer recommends the use of a camera which
outputs mirror reversed images, otherwise screen
image may appear reversed.
%
Touch [Antenna Control] in System
menu.
!
Immediately confirm whether the display
changes to a rear view camera image when
the shift lever is moved to REVERSE (R)
from another position.
When the whole screen changes to a rear
view camera image during normal driving,
switch to another setting.
Touching [Antenna Control] switches be-
tween [Radio] and [Power].
p Regardless of whether [Radio] or [Power]
is selected, turning off the ignition switch
will cause the antenna to automatically re-
tract.
!
p Initially, this function is set to [Off].
Setting the illumination color
1
Touch [Camera] in System menu.
The illumination color can be selected Blue or
Red.
1
Touch [Illumi Color] in System menu.
140
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
Customizing the AV Source Setting
09
a cinema-sized picture (wide screen pic-
ture) where captions lie outside the frame.
Zoom (zoom)
A 4:3 picture is enlarged in the same pro-
portion both vertically and horizontally;
ideal for a cinema-sized picture (wide
screen picture).
2
Touch desired color.
!
Setting the screen color
You can select one of five colors as the screen
color.
1
2
Touch [Screen Color] in System menu.
!
Normal (normal)
A 4:3 picture is displayed as it is, giving you
no sense of disparity since its proportions
are the same as that of the normal picture.
Touch desired color.
White/Blue/Yellow/Red/Green
!
p Different settings can be memorized for
each video source.
Changing the Wide Screen
Mode
p When video is viewed in a wide screen
mode that does not match its original as-
pect ratio, it may appear differently.
p Remember that use of this system for com-
mercial or public viewing purposes may
constitute an infringement on the author’s
rights protected by the Copyright Law.
p Video will appear grainy when viewed in
Cinema or Zoom mode.
CAUTION
For safety reasons, you cannot use some of these
navigation functions while your vehicle is in mo-
tion. To enable these functions, you must stop in
a safe place and apply the parking brake (refer to
p The navigation map and the rear view cam-
era picture is always Full.
%
Touch [Wide Mode] in System menu to
select the desired setting.
Touch [Wide Mode] repeatedly to switch be-
tween the following settings:
Full (full) — Just (just) — Cinema (cinema) —
Zoom (zoom) — Normal (normal)
!
Full (full)
A 4:3 picture is enlarged in the horizontal
direction only, enabling you to enjoy a 4:3
TV picture (normal picture) without any
omissions.
!
Just (just)
The picture is enlarged slightly at the center
and the amount of enlargement increases
horizontally toward the ends of the picture,
enabling you to enjoy a 4:3 picture without
sensing any disparity even on a wide
screen.
!
Cinema (cinema)
A picture is enlarged by the same propor-
tion as Just in the horizontal direction and
by an intermediate proportion between Full
and Zoom in the vertical direction; ideal for
141
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
09
Customizing the AV Source Setting
p If you select [Source], sources without
Operating the Picture
Adjustment
video and sources with video are saved se-
parately in the memory.
p The picture adjustment may not be able to
be used with some rear view cameras.
p The same setting is selected for the normal
background picture and the navigation
map display.
p Because of the LCD screen characteristics,
you may not be able to adjust the screen at
low temperatures.
CAUTION
For safety reasons, you cannot use some of these
navigation functions while your vehicle is in mo-
tion. To enable these functions, you must stop in
a safe place and apply the parking brake (refer to
1
2
Touch [V.Adjust] in System menu.
3
Touch [+] or [-] to adjust the selected
item.
Select the desired item you want to ad-
just.
Each time you touch [+] or [-] increases or de-
creases the level of selected item. +24 to -24
is displayed as the level is increased or de-
creased.
!
Camera — Switch to the picture adjust-
ment display for the rear view camera
Source — Switch to the picture adjustment
display for the AV source screen
Map — Switch to the picture adjustment
display for the map screen
!
!
p Adjust Dimmer in the range of +1 to +48.
4
Touch [ESC] to return to the previous
p When the display is already on the screen,
screen.
a message to that effect appears.
Switching the backlight On/Off
By turning off the backlight of the LCD screen,
you can turn off the screen display without
turning off the voice guidance.
%
Touch [Screen Off] in System menu.
The backlight turns off, and the screen turns
off.
Brightness — Adjust the black intensity
Contrast — Adjust the contrast
Color — Adjust the color saturation
Hue — Adjust the tone of color (red is empha-
sized or green is emphasized)
p To turn on the backlight, touch the screen
again or press MAP button.
Dimmer — Adjust the brightness of display
p The adjustments of Brightness, Contrast
and Dimmer are stored separately when
your vehicle’s headlights are off (daytime)
and when your vehicle’s headlights are on
(nighttime). These are switched automati-
cally depending on the vehicle’s headlights
are on or off.
p You cannot adjust Color and Hue for the
source without video and navigation map
display.
142
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
Customizing the AV Source Setting
Language Code Chart for DVD
09
Language (code), input code
Japanese (ja), 1001
English (en), 0514
French (fr), 0618
Spanish (es), 0519
German (de), 0405
Italian (it), 0920
Language (code), input code
Guarani (gn), 0714
Gujarati (gu), 0721
Hausa (ha), 0801
Language (code), input code
Pashto, Pushto (ps), 1619
Quechua (qu), 1721
Rhaeto-Romance (rm), 1813
Kirundi (rn), 1814
Rumanian (ro), 1815
Kinyarwanda (rw), 1823
Sanskrit (sa), 1901
Sindhi (sd), 1904
Hindi (hi), 0809
Croatian (hr), 0818
Hungarian (hu), 0821
Armenian (hy), 0825
Interlingua (ia), 0901
Interlingue (ie), 0905
Inupiak (ik), 0911
Indonesian (in), 0914
Icelandic (is), 0919
Hebrew (iw), 0923
Yiddish (ji), 1009
Javanese (jw), 1023
Georgian (ka), 1101
Kazakh (kk), 1111
Greenlandic (kl), 1112
Cambodian (km), 1113
Kannada (kn), 1114
Kashmiri (ks), 1119
Kurdish (ku), 1121
Kirghiz (ky), 1125
Chinese (zh), 2608
Dutch (nl), 1412
Portuguese (pt), 1620
Swedish (sv), 1922
Russian (ru), 1821
Korean (ko), 1115
Greek (el), 0512
Sango (sg), 1907
Serbo-Croatian (sh), 1908
Shinghalese (si), 1909
Slovak (sk), 1911
Slovenian (sl), 1912
Samoan (sm), 1913
Shona (sn), 1914
Somali (so), 1915
Albanian (sq), 1917
Serbian (sr), 1918
Siswati (ss), 1919
Sesotho (st), 1920
Sundanese (su), 1921
Swahili (sw), 1923
Tamil (ta), 2001
Afar (aa), 0101
Abkhazian (ab), 0102
Afrikaans (af), 0106
Amharic (am), 0113
Arabic (ar), 0118
Assamese (as), 0119
Aymara (ay), 0125
Azerbaijani (az), 0126
Bashkir (ba), 0201
Belorussian (be), 0205
Bulgarian (bg), 0207
Bihari (bh), 0208
Latin (la), 1201
Lingala (ln), 1214
Telugu (te), 2005
Tajik (tg), 2007
Bislama (bi), 0209
Bengali, Bangla (bn), 0214
Tibetan (bo), 0215
Breton (br), 0218
Catalan (ca), 0301
Corsican (co), 0315
Czach (cs), 0319
Laotian (lo), 1215
Thai (th), 2008
Lithusnian (lt), 1220
Latvian, Lettish (lv), 1222
Malagasy (mg), 1307
Maori (mi), 1309
Macedonian (mk), 1311
Malayalam (ml), 1312
Mongolian (mn), 1314
Moldavian (mo), 1315
Marathi (mr), 1318
Malay (ms), 1319
Tigrinya (ti), 2009
Turkmen (tk), 2011
Tagalog (tl), 2012
Setswana (tn), 2014
Tongan (to), 2015
Turkish (tr), 2018
Tsonga (ts), 2019
Tatar (tt), 2020
Twi (tw), 2023
Ukrainian (uk), 2111
Urdu (ur), 2118
Welsh (cy), 0325
Danish (da), 0401
Bhutani (dz), 0426
Esperanto (eo), 0515
Estonian (et), 0520
Basque (eu), 0521
Persian (fa), 0601
Finnish (fi), 0609
Fiji (fj), 0610
Faroese (fo), 0615
Frisian (fy), 0625
Maltese (mt), 1320
Burmese (my), 1325
Nauru (na), 1401
Uzbek (uz), 2126
Vietnamese (vi), 2209
Volapük (vo), 2215
Wolof (wo), 2315
Xhosa (xh), 2408
Yoruba (yo), 2515
Zulu (zu), 2621
Nepali (ne), 1405
Norwegian (no), 1415
Occitan (oc), 1503
Oromo (om), 1513
Oriya (or), 1518
Irish (ga), 0701
Scottish Gaelic (gd), 0704
Galician (gl), 0712
Panjabi (pa), 1601
Polish (pl), 1612
143
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
Appendix
Troubleshooting
If you have problems operating your navigation system, refer to this section. The most common
problems are listed below, along with likely causes and solutions. While this list is not comprehen-
sive, it should answer your most common problems. If a solution to your problem cannot be
found here, contact your dealer or the nearest authorized Pioneer service facility.
Problems in the navigation screen
Symptom
Cause
Action (See)
Power doesn’t turn on. The unit Leads and connectors are incor-
Confirm once more that all connections are
correct.
doesn’t operate.
rectly connected.
The fuse is blown.
Rectify the reason for the fuse blowing, then
replace the fuse. Be very sure to install a cor-
rect fuse with the same rate.
the built-in microprocessor to oper- manual.)
ate incorrectly.
The power turns on, but the unit The 30-pin cable has been discon-
Press RESET button while the power is on.
does not operate.
nected and then reconnected.
When the ignition switch is
turned ON (or turned to ACC),
the motor sounds.
The navigation system confirms
whether a disc is loaded or not.
This is a normal operation.
You cannot position your vehicle The quality of signals from the GPS Check the GPS signal reception and the posi-
on the map or the positioning
error is large.
satellites is poor, causing reduced
tion of the GPS antenna if necessary, or con-
positioning accuracy. Such a loss of tinue driving until reception improves. Keep
signal quality may happen for the
following reasons:
the antenna clear.
• The GPS antenna is in an unsuita-
ble location.
• Obstacles are blocking signals
from the satellites.
• The position of satellites relative to
your vehicle is bad.
• Signals from the GPS satellites
have been modified to reduce accu-
racy. (GPS satellites are operated by
the US Department of Defense, and
the US government reserves the
right to distort positioning data for
military reasons. This may lead to
greater positioning errors.)
• If a vehicle phone or cellular
phone is used near the GPS anten-
na, GPS reception may be lost tem-
porarily.
144
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
Appendix
Something covers the GPS antenna. Do not cover the GPS antenna with spray
paint or vehicle wax, because this may block
You cannot position your vehicle
on the map or the positioning
error is large.
the reception of GPS signals. Snow buildup
can also degrade the signals.
Signals from the vehicle’s speed
Check that the cables are properly connected.
pulse are not being picked up prop- If necessary, consult the dealer that installed
erly.
the system.
The navigation system may not be
mounted securely in your vehicle.
Check that the navigation system is securely
mounted and, if necessary, consult the dealer
that installed the system.
Your vehicle is operating in Simple Connect the speed signal input (pink lead
hybrid mode.
wire) of the power cable correctly, and reset
the 3D Hybrid Sensor memory ([Learning
Status]).
The navigation system is installed
with an extreme angle exceeding
the limitation of the installation
angle.
Confirm the installation angle. (The naviga-
tion system must be installed within the al-
lowed installation angle. For details, refer to
“Installation Manual”.)
Indication of the position of your ve- Check whether or not the reverse gear signal
hicle is misaligned after a U-turn or input lead (violet) is connected properly. (The
reversing.
navigation system works properly without the
lead connected, but positioning accuracy will
be adversely affected.)
The map continually reorients it- The traveling direction is set to
Touch
on the screen and change the map
self.
Heading up.
display.
Tracking marks are not dis-
played.
[Tracking Display] is turned off.
Check [Tracking Display] settings and make
sure [Always] or [This Trip] is selected.
The daylight display is used
[Daytime] is set to [Day/Night Dis- Check [Day/Night Display] setting and make
even when the vehicle lights are play].
on.
The orange/white lead is not con-
nected.
Check the connection.
The system will not switch on or Installation or connection has been Check with your dealer.
will not operate.
carried out incorrectly.
The display is very dim.
The vehicle’s light is turned ON, and Read about [Day/Night Display] setting and,
[Nighttime] is selected on [Day/
Night Display].
The vehicle cabin temperature is ex- A Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) is used, and
tremely low.
such displays tend to darken when cold. Wait
for the vehicle to warm up.
Picture quality adjustment of the
display is not correct.
ity.
No sounds are heard.
The volume level will not rise.
The volume level is low.
Adjust the volume level.
Turn the attenuator or mute off.
Check the connection.
The attenuator or mute is on.
The speaker lead is disconnected.
Adjusting the volume of naviga- You cannot adjust them with VO-
tion guidance and beeps is not LUME knob.
possible.
Turn the volume up or down according to [Vo-
145
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
Appendix
The sound for the entry of [Address Set the sound setting of that entry to [No
Book] is set.
A strange sound is heard when
the vehicle comes close to a cer-
tain place (e.g. Dog barking).
Slope is not displayed on Vehi- The speed pulse lead is not con-
Connect the speed pulse lead.
cle Dynamics screen.
nected.
“Inclination” does not move on
3D Calibration screen.
The person on the other end of The voice from the person on the
Use the following methods to reduce the
the phone call cannot hear the other end of the phone call is output echo:
conversation due to an echo.
from the speakers and then picked —Lower the volume on the receiver
up by the microphone again, creat- —Have both speakers pause slightly before
ing an echo.
speaking
Playback is not possible.
The disc is dirty.
Clean disc.
The loaded disc is a type this unit
cannot play.
Check what type the disc is.
A non-compatible video system disc Change to a disc compatible to your video
is loaded.
system.
There’s no picture.
The parking brake cord is not con-
nected.
Connect the parking brake cord, and apply
the parking brake.
The parking brake is not applied.
Connect the parking brake cord, and apply
the parking brake.
The audio and video skip.
This unit is not firmly secured.
Secure this unit firmly.
Rear display picture disappears. The source disc being listened to in Before ejecting the disc, switch the source.
the navigation system has been
ejected.
This problem may occur when certain con-
nection methods are used.
There was a problem with the rear
display or a faulty wiring connec-
tion.
Check the rear display and its connection.
Switch the source with a video.
The source without a video is se-
lected.
Problems in the AV screen (during DVD-Video playback)
Symptom
Cause
Action (See)
CD or DVD playback is not pos- The disc is inserted upside down.
Insert the disc with the label upward.
Clean disc.
sible.
The disc is dirty.
The disc is cracked or otherwise da- Insert a normal, round disc.
maged.
The files on the “CD (DVD)” are an
irregular file format.
Check the file format.
Replace disc.
The “CD (DVD)” format cannot be
played back.
cannot play.
type of media.)
146
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
Appendix
The parking brake lead is not con-
nected or applied.
Connect a parking brake lead correctly, and
apply the parking brake.
No picture.
Parking brake interlock is activated. Park your vehicle in a safe place and apply
the parking brake. (Page 20)
[AV1 Input] or [AV2 Input] setting Please read the following page and set the
is incorrect.
setting correctly. (Page 139)
The audio skips.
The navigation system is not firmly Secure the navigation system firmly.
secured.
“Rear display” picture disap-
pears.
There was a problem with the “Rear Check the “Rear display” and its connection.
display” or a faulty wiring connec-
tion, for example.
[DVD/DivX Setup] is carried out.
You can not display the video image to “Rear
display” during [DVD/DivX Setup] menu.
Nothing is displayed and the
touch panel keys cannot be
used.
The setting for the rear view camera Connect a rear view camera correctly.
is incorrect.
The shift lever was placed in [R]
Press MAP button to return to the map
when the rear view camera was not screen first and display AV MENU and then
connected.
switch [Camera] to [Off] in System menu.
(For details concerning operations, refer to
The back light of the LCD panel is
turned off.
Turn on the back light. (Page 142)
Touch panel key is not respond Touch panel keys deviate from the
or a different key is responding. actual positions that respond to
your touch for some reason.
Perform the touch panel calibration. (Page
“NO SIGNAL” is displayed at the While waiting for a response from
Wait for a while and try the operation again.
right corner on the map.
the XM tuner.
You are in an area that cannot re-
ceive XM tuner reception.
Move into an area that can receive XM tuner
reception.
Your current location provides very Change your location.
poor reception.
“UPDATING” is displayed at the Service subscription is either XM
Since the GEX-P10XMT is capable of receiving
both XM audio and XM NavTraffic service, if
you are subscribed to only one or the other,
the system checks to see if you have added
another service to your account since you
last powered on the navigation system. When
you subscribe to both services, this message
will stop appearing when you turn the ignition
ON (ACC ON).
right corner on the map.
audio only or XM NavTraffic stand
alone.
No sounds are heard.
Cables are not connected correctly. Connect the cables correctly.
The volume level will not rise.
The system is performing still, slow There is no sound during still, slow motion, or
motion, or frame-by-frame playback frame-by-frame playback with DVD-Video.
with DVD-Video.
The system is paused or performing, For an MP3/WMA/AAC, there is no sound on
fast rewind or forward during the
MP3/WMA/AAC disc playback.
fast rewind or forward.
The icon 9 is displayed, and op- The operation is not compatible
eration is not possible. with the DVD’s configuration.
This operation is not possible. (For example,
the DVD playing does not feature that angle,
audio system, subtitle language, etc.)
147
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
Appendix
Reading of data has become impos- After touching g once, start playback once
sible during DVD playback.
more.
The picture stops (pauses) and
the unit cannot be operated.
The picture is stretched, the as- The aspect setting is incorrect for
pect is incorrect. the display.
Select the appropriate setting for that image.
A parental lock message is dis- Parental lock is on.
played and DVD playback is not
possible.
Turn parental lock off or change the level.
Parental lock for DVD playback The code number is incorrect.
cannot be canceled.
Input the correct code number. (Page 135)
Playback is not with the audio
The DVD playing does not feature
Switching to a selected language is not possi-
ble if the language selected in [DVD/DivX
Setup] is not recorded on the disc.
language and subtitle language dialog or subtitles in the language
settings selected in [DVD/DivX selected in [DVD/DivX Setup].
Setup].
Switching the viewing angle is
not possible.
The DVD playing does not feature
scenes shot from multiple angles.
You cannot switch between multiple angles if
the DVD does not feature scenes recorded
from multiple angles.
You are trying to switch to multiple Switch between multiple angles when watch-
angle viewing of a scene that is not ing scenes recorded from multiple angles.
recorded from multiple angles.
The picture is extremely unclear/ The disc features a signal to prohibit Since the navigation system is compatible
distorted and dark during play- copying. (Some discs may have
back. this.)
with the copy guard analog copy protect sys-
tem, when playing a disc that has a signal
prohibiting copying, the picture may suffer
from horizontal stripes or other imperfections
when viewed on some displays. This does not
mean this unit is malfunctioning.
Problems in the AV screen (during iPod playback)
Symptom
Cause
Action (See)
Cannot be operated.
The iPod is frozen.
! Reconnect the iPod with the interface cable
for iPod (sold separately).
! Update the iPod version.
The error has occurred.
! Reconnect the iPod with the interface cable
for iPod (sold separately).
! Set the ACC to Off and set it to On again.
! Update the iPod version.
When the screen is frozen...
Park your vehicle in a safe place, and cut off
the engine. Turn the ignition key back to “Acc
off”. Then start the engine again, and turn the
power to the navigation system back on. If this
does not solve the problem, press RESET but-
ton on the navigation system.
148
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
Appendix
Messages and how to react to them
The following messages may be displayed by your navigation system.
p
There are occasions when you may see error messages other than those shown here. In such a case, follow the in-
structions given on the display.
Message
When
What to do (See)
Please insert the appropriate If you try to use a disc which is in-
Insert a suitable disc.
disc.
compatible with this system.
If you insert a disc upside down.
If the disc is dirty.
ATTENTION This is not the ap-
propriate disc. Please insert
the appropriate disc.
Insert the disc with the label upward.
Clean the disc.
If the disc is cracked or otherwise
damaged.
Insert a normal, round disc.
Irregular speed pulse signal is If the Navigation system does not re- Consult your Pioneer dealer.
detected. Please power off
the system and check the in-
stallation. After you have
checked, please re-boot the
system and press "OK".
ceive the vehicle speed pulse.
Speed pulse wire is not con-
nected. System will start to
learn without speed pulse.
Please keep in mind that accu-
racy is not fully ensured with-
out speed pulse.
The speed signal input (pink lead
wire) of the power cable is not con- speed signal input (pink lead wire) of the
nected.
To operate with 3D hybrid mode, connect the
power cable correctly.
Although it can be operated with Simple hy-
brid mode without connecting the speed sig-
nal input, the precision of the positioning will
be less accurate.
Vibration is detected. Please
power off the system and
check the installation. After
you have checked, please re-
boot the system and press
"OK ".
The navigation unit is installed in a Re-install the navigation unit in a place where
place where it may be affected by a the unit will not be affected by vibration.
large vibration.
Direction of G sensor is not
Direction of G sensor is set incor-
See the “Installation Manual” and set the di-
correct. Please power off the rectly.
system and check the installa-
tion. After you have checked,
please re-boot the system and
press "OK".
rection of the navigation unit correctly.
Gyro Sensor is not working
properly. Please consult your the Gyrosensor.
dealer or Pioneer service cen-
ter.
Abnormal output is detected from
Note down the error code shown on the
screen. Turn off the power, and then contact
your nearest Pioneer service facility.
This function is not available The screen cannot be displayed with If the sensor learning status reaches the Sen-
now. Vehicle Dynamics Display. Because sor Initializing status, the system is ready to
the sensor has not been taught so
the sensor information cannot be
acquired.
be used.
149
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
Appendix
If the mounting angle of the naviga- The system initializes the sensor in order to
tion unit has been changed.
operate it with the maximum performance
and automatically starts re-learning.
System detected that the ver-
tical angle of the installation
has been changed. Learning
status for Gyro Sensor has
been initialized.
System detected that the ver- The navigation system is installed
tical angle of the installation with an extreme angle exceeding
exceeds the permission level. the limitation of the installation
Confirm the installation angle. (The naviga-
tion system must be installed within the al-
lowed installation angle. For details refer to
Installation Manual.)
Please install the navigation
unit correctly.
angle.
No data available at this time. If no data is available that can be
Wait for a while and try the operation again.
Wait for a while and try the operation again.
used with the XM tuner.
No XM signal. Please wait.
While waiting for a response from
the XM tuner.
You are in an area that cannot re-
ceive XM tuner reception.
Move into an area that can receive XM tuner
reception.
Your current location provides very Change your location.
poor reception.
XM updating. Please wait.
Service subscription is either XM
audio only or XM NavTraffic stand
alone.
Since the GEX-P10XMT is capable of receiving
both XM audio and XM NavTraffic service, if
you are subscribed to only one or the other,
the system checks to see if you have added
another service to your account since you
last powered on the navigation system. When
you subscribe to both services, this message
will stop appearing when you turn the ignition
ON (ACC ON).
Radio is being updated with the lat- Wait until the encryption code is fully up-
est encryption code.
dated.
Updating
The selected channel is not in-
cluded in your subscription.
Select another channel.
Radio is being updated with the lat- Wait until the encryption code is fully up-
est encryption code.
dated.
Route calculation was not
possible.
Route calculation has failed be-
cause of a malfunction of map data, • Clean the disc.
• Change the destination.
software, hardware or disc.
• Consult the Pioneer Local dealer if this mes-
sage persists.
Route calculation was not
possible because the destina-
tion is too far.
The destination is too far.
• Set a destination closer to the starting
point.
• Set one or more way points.
Route calculation was not
The destination or way point(s) are Set a destination or way point(s) farther from
possible because the destina- too close.
the starting point.
tion is too near.
Route calculation was not
• The destination or way point(s) are • Set a destination and way point(s) outside
possible due to traffic regula- in a Control Traffic Zone (CTR) and the CTR if you know where the restricted area
tions.
the route calculation is hampered. is.
• Your vehicle is currently in a Con- • Try a destination or way point(s) away from
trol Traffic Zone (CTR) and the route the currently set points to some extent.
calculation is hampered.
• Drive your vehicle to an unrestricted area
and reset the destination and way point(s).
150
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
Appendix
The destination, way point(s) or
• Set a destination and way point(s) on roads.
starting point are in an area where • Reset the destination after you drive the ve-
no road exists (e.g. a mountain) and hicle to any road.
the route calculation is impossible.
Route calculation was not
possible because no guidance
can be provided around the
destination or the starting
point.
There is no route to the desti- The destination or way point(s) are Change the destination.
nation.
on an isolated island, etc. without a
ferry and the route calculation is im-
possible.
The route could not avoid the If route setting cannot avoid speci- If the current route is not desired, set a desti-
specified area.
fied Designate Areas to Avoid.
nation or way point(s) that do not pass
through Designate Areas to Avoid.
The route could not avoid the If the route to the destination or way If the current route is not desired, set a desti-
specified area. Toll road has
not been avoided.
point(s) cannot be established by
bypassing toll roads (including toll through toll roads (including toll areas) and
nation or way point(s) that do not pass
areas) and Designate Areas to
Designate Areas to Avoid.
Avoid.
Ferry has not been avoided.
In case a ferry route was included in If the current route is not desired, set a desti-
the route to the destination or way nation or way point(s) that do not pass
point(s) even though [Avoid Ferry] through a ferry route.
was set to [On].
Toll road has not been
avoided.
If the route to the destination or way If the current route is not desired, set a desti-
point(s) cannot be established by
nation or way point(s) that do not pass
bypassing toll roads (including toll through toll roads (including toll areas).
areas).
The address does not exist.
Do you want to continue?
If the house number is entered with- Re-enter the existing house number by follow-
out specifying city or street and that ing the instructions shown on the screen.
house number does not exist on the Or, proceed to the next step without entering
data.
the house number and specify the city or
street first.
There is no applicable data for If the history data of the city could
Once the search is performed to specify the
the selected city. Automati-
cally returning to list.
not be used (for example, if the his- city, the result is saved as a history. The data
tory data of the city that was used in of the specified city, however, may not be hit
POI Search cannot be found in Ad- by the different search criteria. In this case,
dress Search).
try another search method or change the des-
tination.
There is no Freeway in this
area.
If no freeway was found in the se-
lected zone.
Set the destination or way points using an-
other search method or change the location
of the destination or way point(s).
This area does not contain
Vicinity Search cannot be per-
Replace the DVD Map Disc and perform Vici-
any POI's of the selected type. formed because the searched loca- nity Search again.
tion is in areas not stored on the
DVD Map Disc.
Facilities of the selected category do Use another search method or move to an-
not exist in the surrounding areas. other location and perform Vicinity Search
again.
Only City Center can be
searched.
If POI Search was performed on
areas not stored on the DVD Map
Disc.
Only the City Center can be searched. If you
want to search other categories in areas not
stored on the disc, replace the DVD Map Disc
and perform the POI Search again. Set the
areas stored on the DVD Map Disc to destina-
tion or way points.
151
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
Appendix
When areas not stored on the DVD Set the destination or way point(s) in the
Map Disc are included in the
search.
countries stored on the DVD Map Disc, or re-
place the DVD Map Disc and perform the
search again.
This zone is not available on
the disc. Please insert an ap-
propriate disc.
Failed to make the route pro- Failed to generate the route profile
Insert the DVD Map Disc and retry.
file.
because the set route passes
through areas not stored on the
DVD Map Disc.
The maximum number of re- If there are already 300 items when Delete unnecessary data and try to register
gistrations has been com-
pleted. Please clear existing
registered items and re-regis-
ter current item.
you attempt to register an item in
Address Book.
again.
Memory is full.
When a total of 300 registered
Delete unnecessary data on the system and
points are in the disc and Address try to register again or reduce currently se-
Book, you attempt moving an item lected items.
to Address Book from disc.
There is no /PICTURES/ folder. Cannot load the image because PIC- Use the appropriate data after reading Page
folder and store JPEG files in serted disc.
that Folder.
There is no Disc. Please insert The disc in which the background
Insert the disc that contains the background
a Disc with JPEG files stored in picture is stored is not correctly in- pictures.
the /PICTURES/ folder.
serted.
Data read error. Change is
cancelled.
Failed to read the data because the Try re-reading the data by inserting a clean
disc is damaged or dirty. Or, the
pick-up lens of the DVD drive is
dirty.
disc.
Clean the pick-up lens with a commercially
available cleaning kit for DVD, then try to
reading again.
JPEG file is corrupt. Change is The data is damaged or an attempt Use the appropriate data after reading Page
cancelled.
does not conform to specifications
as the background picture.
Data Read error. Back to Origi- Failed to read the data because the Try re-reading the data by inserting a clean
nal Background. Please do not disc is damaged or dirty. Or, the disc.
turn power off.
pickup lens of the DVD drive is dirty. Clean the pick-up lens with a commercially
available cleaning kit for DVD, then try to
reading again.
There are no files available in PICTURES folder exists on the disc Use the appropriate data after reading Page
/PICTURES/ folder.
but no data in JPEG format exists.
Please insert the appropriate In the memory navi mode, if the
Insert the DVD Map Disc.
disc. Route calculation was
not possible.
Auto-reroute does not function for
some reason.
No route data can be stored. The area to be set for [Map in Mem- • Change the memory area to be set to “areas
You should insert the disc that ory] is “areas not stored on the DVD stored on the DVD Map Disc”.
contains the map data of the Map Disc”.
• Insert the DVD Map Disc containing that
current position.
area.
•Scaling down.
•Scaling up.
In the memory navi mode, if the
DVD Map Disc is inserted without
The scale automatically returns to the scale
that was set in the DVD navi mode before
changing the scale (only when the being changed to the memory navi mode.
point is stored on the DVD Map
Disc).
152
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
Appendix
When the scale that had been pre- If the desired scale cannot be selected, insert
viously displayed cannot be dis-
played for the following reasons:
• The disc was ejected and the sys-
tem was changed to the memory
navi mode.
the DVD Map Disc that contains that area
and then change the scale.
• No map data available on
this scale. Scaling up.
• No map data available on
this scale. Scaling down.
• In the memory navi mode, the
map was scrolled to outside the
memory area. Or, the vehicle moved
outside of the memory area.
• The map was scrolled to areas not
stored on the DVD Map Disc. Or, the
vehicle moved to unrecorded areas.
• The map was scrolled from unrec-
orded areas to the memory area. Or,
the vehicle moved from unrecorded
areas to the memory area.
Failure in the memory recov- Failed to complete the recovery of
• Clean the disc.
ery process. Memory naviga- the memory area because the disc • Clean the DVD drive.
tion is presently not possible. could not be read for some reason, • Consult the Pioneer Local dealer if this mes-
resulting in deletion of the memory. sage persists.
The map data could not be
stored. Previous setting will
be kept.
Recovery was performed for the
memory area after failing to read
the disc data for some reason (the
memory area that was previously
set will be recovered).
• Clean the disc.
• Clean the DVD drive.
• Consult the Pioneer Local dealer if this mes-
sage persists.
This function is not available The current position is “areas not
Zoom in again after the vehicle moves into an
area stored on the DVD Map Disc.
with the current map disc.
stored on the DVD Map Disc” and
an attempt was made to zoom in to Or, replace the DVD Map Disc and try to
make the scale 0.5 mile or more. zoom in again.
Failed to save to memory.
Please re-enter setting.
The settings could not be saved for • Retry.
some reason.
• Consult the Pioneer Local dealer if this mes-
sage persists.
CAUTION! System detected
Parking brake lead is incorrectly
Confirm once more that their connections are
correct.
improper connection of Park- connected.
ing Brake lead. Please check
your configuration for safety.
Please see Operation Manual
for more information regard-
ing safe operation.
Viewing of front seat video
source while driving is strictly
prohibited.
Parking brake interlock is activated. Park your vehicle in the safe place and apply
the parking brake. (Page 20)
153
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
Appendix
Error Messages
When problems occur with AV source playback, an error message appears on the display. Refer
to the table below to identify the problem, then take the suggested corrective action. If the error
persists, contact your dealer or your nearest PIONEER Service Center.
The messages in “( )” will appear on the “Rear display”.
Message
Cause
Action (See)
Reading error
Dirty
Clean disc.
(ERROR-02-XX)
Scratched disc
The disc is loaded upside down
Electrical or mechanical
Replace disc.
Check that the disc is loaded correctly.
Mechanism error
manual.)
Region code error (DIFFERENT The disc does not have the same re- Replace the DVD-Video with one bearing the
REGION DISC)
gion number as the navigation sys- correct region number.
tem.
NON-PLAYABLE DISC
This type of disc cannot be played
by the navigation system
Replace the disc with one the navigation sys-
tem can play.
Thermal error (THERMAL PRO- The temperature of the navigation
TECTION IN MOTION)
Wait until the unit’s temperature returns to
system is outside of the normal op- within normal operating limits.
erating range
Error not defined (ERROR-FF- Undefined error
FF)
manual.)
Non-playable tracks are
skipped. (FILE SKIPPED)
Files that are protected by digital
rights management.
The protected files are skipped.
Impossible to play all tracks.
(PROCETED DISC,DRM Pro-
tected)
All the files on the inserted disc are Replace disc.
secured by DRM.
Flash writing error. Impossible The playback history for VOD con-
• Try saving again.
to write on the flash. (CAN
tents cannot be saved for some rea- • If the message appears frequently, consult
NOT SAVE DATA)
son.
your dealer.
Authorization Error (AUTHOR- The device does not match the de-
Check whether this device has been regis-
IZATION ERROR)
vice registered with the VOD provi- tered with the VOD provider.
der. VOD contents cannot be played
back.
NON-PLAYABLE FILE
VOD rental contents file error
• Try saving again.
• If the message appears frequently, consult
your dealer.
Played back a disc with incompati- Playback a disc with compatible format.
ble format.
ERROR-11
ERROR-21
Connected an iPod with no charge. • Turn [iPod Charge] is [On] and reconnect
the iPod.
• Connect a charged iPod.
The iPod version is not compatible. Use an iPod with a compatible version.
154
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
Appendix
10 Reenter the password in step 7 to con-
firm the setting.
Anti-theft function
You can set a password for the navigation sys-
tem. If the back-up lead is cut or RESET button
is pressed after the password is set, the navi-
gation system prompts for the password next
boot up.
11 Touch [OK].
The password is set.
Enter the password
If the incorrect password is entered, the navi-
gation and AV functions cannot be performed.
In password input screen, you must enter the
current password. If you enter the incorrect
password three times, the navigation system
is locked.
Setting the password
Set both the password and a hint phrase at
the same time. Set a password based on the
hint phrase. The hint phrase will remind you of
the password in case you forget it.
1
Enter the password.
2
Touch [OK].
The password mode is canceled.
1
With the map displayed, press MENU
button.
Delete the password
2
3
4
Touch [Settings] in NAVI MENU.
The current password can be deleted.
Touch [System Options].
1
With the map displayed, press MENU
button.
Touch Area1, followed by Area2, and
then touch and hold Area3.
2
3
4
Touch [Settings] in NAVI MENU.
Area1
Area2
Area3
Touch [System Options].
Touch Area1, followed by Area2, and
then touch and hold Area3.
The password setting screen appears.
5
6
7
8
Touch [Clear password].
Enter the current password.
Touch [OK].
The password setting screen appears.
5
6
Touch [Set password].
Select a hint phrase.
Touch [Yes].
p Touching or switches to the next or pre-
vious page in the list.
The current password is deleted.
7
8
Touch [OK].
If the password is forgotten
Contact the nearest authorized Pioneer Ser-
vice Station.
Enter the password you want to set.
p Five to sixteen characters can be entered
for a password.
9
Touch [OK].
155
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
Appendix
3
Touch [Yes/Oui].
Installing the Program
When you start the navigation system for the
first time, you will see a confirmation message
asking if you wish to select another language.
English is the default language of the naviga-
tion system. If desired, you can select another
language as shown.
p To keep English, touch [No/Non].
p When you want to select another language,
touch [Yes/Oui], and proceed to the next
step.
The program is installed to the navigation sys-
tem using the application disc.
This is not necessary if your dealer al-
ready performed the installation.
When installing the program, you carry out
the following operations. When all the setup
procedures are completed, you can use the
navigation system.
1 Insert the disc while the vehicle is parked.
4
Select the language from the list.
Touch the language you want to use.
j
2 Select the language used for the navigation
system.
j
3 Set the time difference.
CAUTION
p The language selected here is reflected for
the Navigation functions (e.g., Destination
search, etc.) only.
Installation of the program begins in the lan-
guage that you chose.
Once the installation of the program starts, do
not stop the engine of your vehicle nor switch off
the navigation system until the installation is
completed and the following Map screen with
current position appears.
1
Park your vehicle in a safe place.
Leave the engine on, and make sure that the
parking brake is applied.
2
Insert the Pioneer DVD Map Disc into
the disc loading slot of the navigation sys-
tem.
When the upgraded program has been found,
installation of the program starts immediately.
p Do not insert anything other than a disc
into the disc loading slot.
When the installation is complete, the opening
display appears.
p If you cannot insert a disc completely or if
an inserted disc is not recognized, check
that the label side of the disc is up. Press
EJECT button to eject the disc, and check
the disc for damage before inserting the
disc again.
156
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
Appendix
8
To complete the setting, touch [Back].
Some time is needed until navigation is ready.
5
Check the details of the caution mes-
The map of your surroundings appears.
This completes the setup of your navigation
sage and touch [OK].
system. Chapter 2 explains the basic operation
of your navigation system.
6
[-].
To set the time difference, touch [+] or
Adjusting the Response
Positions of the Touch Panels
(Touch Panel Calibration)
If you feel that the touch panel keys on the
screen deviate from the actual positions that
respond to your touch, adjust the response po-
sitions of the touch panel screen. There are
two adjustment methods: 4-point adjustment,
in which you touch four corners of the screen,
and 16-point adjustment, in which you make
fine-adjustments on the entire screen.
p Make sure to use the supplied stylus for ad-
justment and gently touch the screen. If
you press the touch panel forcefully, the
touch panel may be damaged. Do not use
a sharp pointed tool such as a ballpoint
pen or a mechanical pen. Otherwise the
screen is damaged.
Time difference
The time difference between the time origin-
ally set in the navigation system (Pacific Stan-
dard Time) and the current location of your
vehicle is shown. If necessary, adjust the time
difference. Touching [+] or [-] changes the
time difference display in one-hour incre-
ments.
The time difference can be set from +3 to -3
hours.
7
If necessary, set to summer time.
Daylight Saving Time (DST) is off by default.
Touch [Off] to change the time if you are in
the daylight saving period. This turns the dis-
play below summer time [On].
Stylus (supplied with navigation
system)
1
Press VOLUME knob (or AV button) to
switch to the AV operation screen.
157
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
Appendix
2
Press MENU button to change to AV
Memory Navi Mode
Source screen.
While the DVD Map Disc is inserted, you can
store the data on the DVD Map Disc into the
memory of the navigation system. If the DVD
Map Disc is removed from the navigation sys-
tem after the data is stored, navigation is per-
formed using the data in the memory
(memory navi mode). In the memory navi
mode, you can play a music CD or DVD-Video
on the navigation system while navigation is
taking place.
3
Press and hold MENU button for two
seconds or more.
The 4-point touch panel adjustment screen ap-
pears.
4
Touch and hold the arrows that point
to the corners of the LCD screen with the
stylus.
The red arrow indicates the order.
The operation is automatically switched to the
memory navi mode when the DVD Map Disc
is removed from the navigation system.
Navigation in the memory navi
mode
During the memory navi mode, navigation is
performed only using the data read into the
memory. Therefore, some functions are re-
stricted compared with navigation using the
DVD Map Disc (DVD navi mode). These func-
tion buttons, which cannot be used in the
memory navi mode, are indicated in light gray.
(If you want to use these functions, please in-
sert the DVD Map Disc again.) In addition, you
may need to insert the DVD Map Disc and
store new data in the memory during naviga-
tion operation, such as when the destination
is far away.
5
Press MENU button.
The adjusted position data is saved.
p Do not turn off the engine while saving the
adjusted position data.
p Press MENU button to complete the 4-point
adjustment.
p To cancel the adjustment, press and hold
MENU button.
6
Press MENU button.
The 16-point touch panel adjustment screen
appears.
7
Gently touch the center of + mark dis-
The memory navi mode uses the following
map data to perform navigation.
The following are collectively known as Mem-
ory Data:
played on the screen with the touch panel
adjustment pen.
After you touch all marks, the adjusted posi-
tion data is saved.
!
Manually downloaded memory area data in
[Map in Memory] of the Settings menu
(Manual downloaded Memory Area)
p Do not turn off the engine while saving the
adjusted position data.
p Press MENU button to return to the pre-
vious adjustment position.
!
Automatically downloaded memory data of
the surrounding areas during the route
search (Auto downloaded Memory Area)
8
Press and hold MENU button.
= For details concerning operations, refer to
The adjustment is complete.
p If touch panel adjustment cannot be per-
formed properly, consult your local Pioneer
dealer.
158
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
Appendix
What is the manual downloaded
memory area?
Memory area is the area of the map data that
the user voluntarily read into the memory for
the memory navi mode. Normal guidance is
available if the memory area is stored and you
drive within the stored area.
• Go to
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
1
• POI Search
• Vicinity Search
• Address Book
• Destination History
• Freeway Search
• Telephone Search
• Cancel Route
What is the auto downloaded
memory area?
This is the zone around the route in the map
area that is automatically stored in the mem-
ory when the route is set. When the route dis-
tance is 74.5 miles (120 km) or shorter, a zone
with a width of approximately 10.9 miles
(17.5 km) around the route is stored.
When the route distance is longer than
74.5 miles (120 km), a zone with a width of ap-
proximately 6.6 miles (10.6 km) around the
route is recorded.
This data is transmitted to the memory as you
set the route. When a new route is entered,
the memorized data is deleted.
The data read into the memory will not be de-
leted even when the vehicle’s engine is turned
off.
Info/Traffic menu
• Traffic On Route
• Traffic Events
—
—
—
1
1
1
1
1
1
—
• Traffic Flow
• Traffic Settings
• XM Status
• Stock Info
• Set My Favorites
• My Favorites
• Emergency Info
• Overlay POI
Route Options menu
• Edit Current Route
• View Current Route
• Recalculate
The memorized area may be deleted in the fol-
lowing circumstances:
—
s
—
1
1
1
1
1
—
!
Yellow lead of the navigation system or the
vehicle battery is disconnected.
RESET button is pressed.
Navigation software is updated.
System language is changed.
!
!
!
• Number of Routes
• Route Condition
• Avoid Freeway
• Avoid Ferry
Navigation operation during the
memory navi mode
• Avoid Toll Road
• Designate Areas to Avoid
Settings menu
!
!
!
1 : Operation possible
s : Operation restricted
— : Operation not possible
• Volume
1
s
1
1
—
NAVI MENU
• System Options
• Short-Cut Selection
• Map Display Options
• Defined Locations
Destination menu
• Address Search
• Return Home
—
—
159
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
Appendix
p Where the navigation guidance is impossi-
ble, the icon is lit in red. In that case, rein-
sert the DVD Map Disc.
• Demo Mode
—
1
• Time
• Modify Current Location
• Hardware Info
• Restore Factory Settings
1
When
disappears, memory navi mode is
ready. You can now remove the DVD Map
Disc.
s*
1
p If you want to remove the DVD Map Disc
while preparing for the memory navi mode,
press EJECT button more than 2 seconds.
When the DVD Map Disc is removed, data
cannot be read any more and preparation
for memory navi mode will be canceled ac-
cordingly. (Since the reading of the map
data used in the memory navi mode is not
complete, the map scale may switch to a
larger scale. In this case, route guidance
will continue up to the location already
memorized.)
In memory navi mode, you will be notified in
three cases: when the distance to the edge of
the memorized area is 12 miles (20 km),
6 miles (10 km) and 3 miles (5 km) respectively.
Preparation for memory navi mode will have to
be repeated if the vehicle enters an unrec-
orded area, then returns to an area stored in
the disc. (Preparation for the memory navi
mode starts from the location where the vehi-
cle re-entered the area stored on the disc.)
*: Product Number in Service Info Screen is not dis-
played.
Shortcut menu
: Destination
—
s
1
—
—
1
—
—
s
—
—
1
1
1
: Change Route
: Registration
: Vicinity Search
: Volume Setting
: Whole Route Overview
: Overlay POI
: Address Book
: Route Options
: Edit Current Route
: Traffic On Route
: Stock Info
: Set My Favorites
: My Favorites
Major restrictions during the
memory navi mode
About the icon for the memory
navi mode
When new route guidance starts, the route
data from the DVD Map Disc is read into the
memory of the navigation system. The status
of the memory navi mode is indicated by the
following icons on the lower right of the map
screen.
(Green flashes): Reading the data
(Green is lit): Operated in memory navi
mode
(Red flashes): Operated in memory navi
mode, but the remaining distance for gui-
dance is less than 12.5 miles.
!
!
The scale cannot be zoomed freely.
If a route was set to your destination in
memory navi mode, inserting the DVD Map
Disc automatically starts recalculation of
another route. (You cannot cancel this re-
route operation. If the route calculation
fails for some reason, a message will ap-
pear asking you to either recalculate a
route (Reroute) or delete the current route
(Delete route). In this case, drive for a while
before touching either “Reroute” or “De-
lete route” to delete the current route, then
reset the destination.)
160
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
Appendix
!
!
In some cases, you may not be able to use
map display mode during DVD navi mode.
If the map display mode is not changed
during memory navi mode, the display will
return to the map display mode used dur-
ing the DVD navi mode when the DVD Map
Disc is set again.
In memory navi mode, map scale data that
cannot be read in the memory cannot be
displayed. Accordingly, the edge of the
map will appear cut off along the point it
was not read into memory. This simply indi-
cates the edge of the map data, and is not
a malfunction.
Cautions relating to auto
reroute in memory navi mode
Auto rerouting in memory navi mode is de-
signed to return you to your original route
wherever possible.
In memory navi mode, persistently deviating
from the route may result in one of the follow-
ing:
!
!
A clearly circuitous route
Leaving a toll road and returning to the toll
road from where you left it
In the above case, if the set route seems un-
suitable, insert the DVD Map Disc that records
your current position. Setting the DVD Map
Disc to navigation automatically resets the
route from your current location to your desti-
nation.
TRAFFIC icon during the
memory navi mode
!
If you keep driving or scrolling the map to a
point where the map can no longer be dis-
played, the scale automatically switches to
a range possible to display. If you would
like to continue driving or scrolling the map
at the same scale, set the DVD Map Disc in
the navigation system.
You cannot reroute to avoid traffic conges-
tion or closure.
If you continue to drive outside the route
for a while, you may not be able to perform
map matching.
If you deviate from the route during mem-
ory navi mode, the set route will be re-
routed, but only to return you to the original
route calculated within the memorized
area.
Although an enlarged map of the intersec-
tion will be displayed, no special freeway il-
lustration (illustration of freeway
!
XM NavTraffic-related data for a “Zone”
(e.g., Zone 1 contain ID, OR, WA) only can
be memorized. Therefore, if
on the screen when crossing a zone border,
you will need to insert the disc to use the
appears
XM NavTraffic function. Touching
al-
lows you to check the locations of the traf-
fic information along the route. However,
you cannot perform rerouting.
!
!
Operation outside the
memorized area
When the vehicle leaves the memorized area,
the functions will be limited.
!
!
!
The auto reroute function does not work.
You can only display a larger scale map.
The map display will automatically change
to a 25 miles (or 50 miles) scale.
!
!
!
The map matching function will not be
available. Therefore, the position of your ve-
hicle may be misaligned.
intersections) will be displayed.
If the XM tuner (GEX-P10XMT, GEX-
P920XM), which is sold separately, is con-
nected, the logo data is not displayed dur-
ing memory navi mode.
161
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
Appendix
!
The navigation guidance will only be avail-
able when arriving at your destination.
Other guidance is not possible (this in-
cludes no display of direction arrows).
Positioning by dead reckoning
The 3D Hybrid Sensor in the navigation system
also calculates your position. The current loca-
tion is measured by detecting driving distance
with the speed pulse, the turning direction
with the Gyrosensor and inclination of the
road with the G sensor.
To cancel these limitations, insert the DVD
Map Disc to the navigation system.
The 3D Hybrid Sensor can even calculate
changes of altitude, and corrects for discre-
pancies in the distance traveled caused by
driving along winding roads or up slopes.
Also, the navigation system learns the driving
conditions and stores information in the mem-
ory. Thus, as you drive more, the precision of
the positioning becomes more accurate.
The method of positioning changes as follows
depending on whether the speed pulse of your
vehicle is detected or not:
Positioning Technology
The navigation system accurately measures
your current location by combining the posi-
tioning by GPS and by Dead Reckoning.
Positioning by GPS
The Global Positioning System (GPS) uses a
network of satellites orbiting the Earth. Each
of the satellites, which orbit at a height of
68 900 000 feet (21 000 km), continually broad-
casts radio signals giving time and position in-
formation. This ensures that signals from at
least three can be picked up from any open
area on the ground’s surface.
3D hybrid mode
This is active when the speed pulse is de-
tected. Inclination of a street can be detected.
Simple hybrid mode
The accuracy of the GPS information depends
on how good the reception is. When the sig-
nals are strong and reception is good, GPS
can determine latitude, longitude and altitude
for accurate positioning in three dimensions.
But if signal quality is poor, only two dimen-
sions, latitude and longitude, can be obtained
and positioning errors are somewhat greater.
When the speed pulse is not detected, posi-
tioning is performed in this mode. Only hori-
zontal movement is detected, so it becomes
less accurate. Also, when the positioning by
GPS is not available, such as when your vehi-
cle enters a long tunnel, the discrepancy be-
tween your actual and calculated position may
become bigger.
p The speed pulse data comes from the
speed sensing circuit. The location of this
speed sensing circuit depends on your ve-
hicle model. In some cases, it is impossible
to make a connection to it, and in such a
case we recommend that ND-PG1 speed
pulse generator (sold separately) be used.
162
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
Appendix
Map matching
How do GPS and dead
As mentioned, the GPS and dead reckoning
systems used by this navigation system are
susceptible to certain errors. Their calcula-
tions may, on occasion, place you in a location
on the map where no road exists. In this situa-
tion, the processing system understands that
vehicles travel only on roads, and can correct
your position by adjusting it to a nearby road.
This is called map matching.
reckoning work together?
For maximum accuracy, your navigation sys-
tem continually compares GPS data with your
estimated position as calculated from the data
of 3D Hybrid Sensor. However, if only the data
from the 3D Hybrid Sensor is available for a
long period, positioning errors are gradually
compounded until the estimated position be-
comes unreliable. For this reason, whenever
GPS signals are available, they are matched
with the data of the 3D Hybrid Sensor and
used to correct it for improved accuracy.
To ensure maximum accuracy, the dead reck-
oning system learns with experience. By com-
paring the position it estimates with your
actual position as obtained using GPS, it can
correct for various types of error, such as tire
wear and the rolling motion of your vehicle. As
you drive, the dead reckoning system gradu-
ally gathers more data, learns more, and the
accuracy of its estimates gradually increases.
So, after you have driven some distance, you
can expect your position as shown on the map
to show fewer errors.
With map matching
p If you use chains on your wheels for winter
driving or put on the spare wheel, errors
may suddenly increase because of differ-
ence in wheel diameter. The system detects
the fact that the tire diameter has changed,
and automatically replaces the value for
calculating distance.
Without map matching
p If ND-PG1 is used or if your vehicle is oper-
ating in Simple hybrid mode, the distance
calculation value cannot be replaced auto-
matically.
Handling Large Errors
Positioning errors are kept to a minimum by
combining GPS, Dead Reckoning and map
matching. However, in some situations, these
functions may not work properly, and the error
may become bigger.
163
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
Appendix
When the positioning by GPS is
impossible
Vehicles that Cannot
Obtain Speed Pulse Data
!
If signals cannot be received from more
than two GPS satellites, GPS positioning
does not take place.
p The speed pulse data comes from the
speed sensing circuit. The location of this
speed sensing circuit depends on your ve-
hicle model. In some cases, it is impossible
to make a connection to it, and in such a
case we recommend that ND-PG1 speed
pulse generator (sold separately) be
used.
!
In some driving conditions, signals from
GPS satellites may not reach your vehicle.
In this case, it is impossible for the system
to use GPS positioning.
Conditions Likely to Cause
Noticeable Positioning Errors
In tunnels or en-
closed parking
garages
Under elevated
roads or similar
structures
For various reasons such as the state of the
road you are traveling on and the state of re-
ception of the GPS signal, the actual position
of your vehicle may differ from the position
displayed on the map screen.
!
!
If you make a shallow turn.
If there is a parallel road.
When driving
among high build-
ings
When driving through
a dense forest or tall
trees
!
!
If a car phone or cellular phone is used
near the GPS antenna, GPS reception may
be lost temporarily.
Do not cover the GPS antenna with spray
paint or car wax, because this may block
the reception of GPS signals. Snow buildup
can also degrade the signals, so keep the
antenna clear.
p If, for any reason, GPS signals cannot be re-
ceived, learning and error correction are
not possible. If GPS positioning has been
operating for only a short time, your vehi-
cle’s actual position and the current loca-
tion mark on the map may diverge
considerably. Once GPS reception is re-
stored, accuracy will be recovered.
164
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
Appendix
!
If there is another road very nearby, such
as in the case of an elevated freeway.
!
If there is a loop or similar road configura-
tion.
!
If you take a recently opened road that is
not on the map.
!
!
If you take a ferry.
If you are driving on a long, straight road or
a gently curving road.
!
!
If you drive in zig-zags.
!
If you are on a steep mountain road with
many height changes.
If the road has connected hairpin bends.
165
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
Appendix
!
If you enter or exit a multi-storey parking lot
or similar structure using a spiral ramp.
!
If trees or other obstacles block the GPS
signals for a considerable period.
!
If you drive very slowly, or in a start-and-
stop manner, as in a traffic congestion.
!
If your vehicle is turned on a turntable or si-
milar structure.
!
If you join the road after driving around a
large parking lot.
!
If your vehicle’s wheels spin, such as on a
gravel road or in snow.
!
When you pass around a traffic circle.
!
If you put on chains, or change your tires
for ones with a different size.
!
!
When starting driving immediately after
starting the engine.
If you insert the disc and turn your naviga-
tion system on while driving.
166
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
Appendix
Some types of vehicles may not output a
speed signal while driving at just a few kilo-
meters per hour. In such a case, the current lo-
cation of your vehicle may not be displayed
correctly while in a traffic congestion or in a
parking lot.
!
!
In case of POI Search and Vicinity Search,
only “City Center” search is possible.
If you cannot search in a currently selected
zone, the system may forcibly switch to the
zone selection screen.
A Freeway Search covers all areas, regard-
less of the disc on which the information is
stored.
If a Vicinity Search is performed on the
border of an area not stored on the disc,
the system will not necessarily select the
nearest facility. (The search will take place
only within the range of areas stored on the
disc.)
!
!
About the Data being Deleted
The information is erased by pushing RESET
button or disconnect yellow lead from battery
(or remove the battery itself), except for the fol-
lowing items.
!
!
!
Sensor learning status and driving status
Memory area memorized manually
Registered area in Designate Areas to
Avoid
Guidance
!
When your vehicle approaches an area not
stored on the disc, you will be notified three
times: when the distance to the area not
stored on the disc is 12 miles (20 km),
6 miles (10 km) and 3 miles (5 km) respec-
tively. When your vehicle enters that area, a
caution is given.
In the areas not stored on the disc, only
guidance for reaching the destination is
provided. No other guidance is given.
If a route calculation is operated within an
areas not stored on the disc, the route
might not be set from the streets you are
currently driving. Also, if you set the desti-
nation in an area not stored on the disc of
the disc, the system may not be able to set
the route up to the destination.
If the vehicle deviates from the set route in
an area not stored on the disc, the Auto Re-
route function will not work.
Even if [Close-up of Junction] is [On], the
display will not switch to an enlarged map
of the junction.
Even if you drive on the freeway, lane infor-
mation, freeway exit numbers and freeway
signs will not be displayed.
!
Registered Locations in Address Book
Limitation of Functions for
Areas not Stored on the Disc
For areas not stored on the disc, the functions
will operate as follows:
!
!
Displaying the map
!
Maps with a scale of between 0.02 mile and
0.25 mile cannot be displayed. (If the scale
was set to between 0.02 mile and 0.25 mile,
it is automatically switched to 0.5 mile.)
When driving with Guide View, Route
View or Driver’s View, upon entering an
area not stored on the disc the display
automatically switches to Map View.
(When the vehicle reenters an area stored
on the disc, the display returns to the pre-
vious map mode except for Driver’s View.)
!
!
!
!
Destination search
!
You cannot search a destination in an area
not stored on the disc using Address
Search or Telephone Search.
167
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
Appendix
Route information
Handling and Care of the Disc
Some basic precautions are necessary when
handling your discs.
!
If the set route goes through an area not
stored on the disc, no route profile for that
area will be displayed. (If the set route tra-
verses both an area not stored on the disc
and area stored on the disc, only the route
profile within the area stored on the disc
will be displayed.)
DVD Map Discs
!
Do not use discs other than those intended
for this product. Use only discs approved
by Pioneer.
!
Route scrolling for an area not stored on
the disc is possible only with a map scale
of 0.5 mile or above.
p If you wish to use other DVD Map Discs,
first check that they are compatible with
this equipment and approved by
Pioneer.
Other function limitations
Overlay POI
DVD drive and care
!
Only display “City Center” is available in
an area not stored on the disc.
!
Use only normal, round discs. If you insert
irregular, non-round, shaped discs they
may jam in the DVD drive or not play prop-
erly.
Memory mode
!
Only data for areas stored on the disc can
be memorized. (Data for areas not stored
on the disc cannot be memorized.)
!
If the vehicle enters an area not stored on
the disc, preparation for memory navi
mode will have to be redone after the vehi-
cle returns to an area stored in the disc.
(Preparation for the memory navi mode
starts from the location where the vehicle
re-entered the area stored on the disc.)
!
!
Check all discs for cracks, scratches or
warping before playing. Discs that have
cracks, scratches or are warped may not
play properly. Do not use such discs.
Avoid touching the recorded (non-printed
side) surface when handling the disc.
Store discs in their cases when not in use.
Keep discs out of direct sunlight and do
not expose the discs to high temperatures.
Do not attach labels to, write on or apply
chemicals to the surface of the discs.
To clean dirt from a disc, wipe the disc with
a soft cloth outward from the center of the
disc.
!
!
Avoid area
!
An area not stored on the disc cannot be
set as an Area to Avoid.
!
!
p A set Designate Areas to Avoid may be
deleted when the software is updated. If
this happens, the system will automatically
try to recover the deleted information, but
data can be recovered only for areas stored
on the disc. For items that could not be re-
covered, a recovery process will begin
when you set another disc.
168
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
Appendix
!
!
If the heater is used in cold weather, con-
densation may form on components inside
the DVD drive. Condensation may cause
the DVD drive to operate incorrectly. If you
think that condensation is a problem, turn
off the DVD drive for an hour or so to allow
the DVD drive to dry out, and wipe any
damp discs with a soft cloth to remove the
moisture.
!
!
When DVD-R/DVD-RW discs are used,
playback is possible only for discs which
have been recorded with the Video format
(video mode). It is not possible to play back
DVD-R/RW discs which have been re-
corded with the Video Recording format
(VR mode).
It may not be possible to play back DVD-R/
DVD-RW discs which have been recorded
with the Video format (video mode), be-
cause of disc characteristics, scratches or
dirt on the disc, or dirt, condensation, etc.
on the lens of this product.
It is not possible to read DVD-ROM discs
other than Pioneer DVD map discs or DVD-
ROMs with MP3, WMA, AAC, or DivX files
burned to it.
Road shocks may interrupt disc playback.
DVD-Video
!
With some DVD-Video discs, it may not be
possible to use certain functions.
It may not be possible to play back some
DVD-Video discs.
!
!
!
This product can play back the disc that fi-
nalized with the following file systems (logi-
cal format):
— CD: ISO9660 level 1 and level 2, Romeo
and Joliet
DVD-R/-RW and CD-R/-RW
!
Playback is possible only for discs which
have been finalized.
!
Playback of discs finalized on a personal
computer may not be possible depending
on the application settings and the environ-
ment. Please finalized with the correct for-
mat. (For details, contact the manufacturer
of the application.)
It may not be possible to playback discs re-
corded on a music CD recorder, DVD recor-
der or a personal computer because of disc
characteristics, scratches or dirt on the
disc, or dirt, condensation, etc. on the lens
of this product.
Playback of discs may become impossible
in case of direct exposure to sunlight, high
temperatures, or the storage conditions in
the vehicle.
Titles and other text information recorded
on a disc may not be displayed by this pro-
duct.
— DVD: ISO9660 level 1 and level 2,
Romeo, Joliet, UDF1.02.
!
When you burn a CD-R/-RW and DVD-R/-
RW, make sure the total data size of the
CD-R/-RW and DVD-R/-RW is greater than
the amount noted below by storing dummy
data or other filler information. Otherwise,
the disc may not be recognized by the built-
in DVD drive.
!
!
— CD-R/-RW: 1.8 MB
— DVD-R/-RW: 170 MB
About playing DualDisc
!
DualDiscs are two-sided discs that have a
recordable CD for audio on one side and a
recordable DVD for video on the other.
Playback of the DVD side is possible with
this unit. However, since the CD side of
DualDiscs is not physically compatible with
the general CD standard, it may not be pos-
sible to play the CD side with this naviga-
tion system.
!
!
!
If you insert a CD-RW/DVD-RW disc into
this product, time to playback will be longer
than when you insert a conventional CD/
DVD or CD-R/DVD-R disc.
Read the precautions with the package of
discs before using them.
!
!
Frequent loading and ejecting of a Dual-
Disc may result in scratches on the disc.
169
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
Appendix
!
Serious scratches can lead to playback pro-
blems on this navigation system. In some
cases, a DualDisc may become stuck in
the disc loading slot and will not eject. To
prevent this, we recommend you refrain
from using DualDisc with this navigation
system.
!
Some audio CDs contain tracks that merge
into one another without a pause. When
these discs are converted to MP3/WMA/
AAC files and burned to a disc, the files will
be played back on this player with a short
pause between each one, regardless of the
length of the pause between tracks on the
original audio CD.
The sound quality of MP3/WMA/AAC files
generally becomes better with an increased
bit rate. In order to be able to enjoy sound
of a certain quality, we recommend using
discs recorded with a higher bit rate.
This unit plays back files with the filename
extension (.mp3, .wma or .m4a) as an MP3/
WMA/AAC file. To prevent noise and mal-
functions, do not use these extensions for
files other than MP3/WMA/AAC files.
!
Please refer to the manufacturer for more
detailed information about DualDiscs.
!
!
MP3, WMA and AAC files
!
WMA data can be encoded by using
Windows Media Player version 7 or later.
The navigation system may not operate cor-
rectly depending on the application used to
encode WMA files.
Depending on the version of Windows
Media Player used to encode WMA files,
album names and other text information
may not be correctly displayed.
There may be a slight delay when starting
playback of WMA/AAC files encoded with
image data.
It is possible to play back multi-session
compatible recorded discs.
!
!
!
MP3 additional information
!
Files are compatible with the ID3 Tag Ver.
1.0, 1.1, 2.2, 2.3 and 2.4 formats for display
of album (disc title), track (track title), artist
(track artist) and comments. Ver. 2.x of ID3
Tag is given priority when both Ver. 1.x and
Ver. 2.x exist.
You can play back MP3 files in the frequen-
cies from 8 kHz to 48 kHz.
This unit is compatible with the emphasis
function.
There is no m3u playlist compatibility.
There is no compatibility with the MP3i
(MP3 interactive) or mp3 PRO formats.
This unit can play recordings with bit rates
from 8 kbps to 320 kbps.
!
!
!
MP3/WMA/AAC files are not compatible
with packet write data transfer.
!
!
The maximum number of characters for
the file and folder name is 64 characters,
including extension (.mp3). However the
navigation system uses proportional font.
Therefore, the number of the characters
that you can display varies according to the
width of each character.
In case of files recorded according to the
Romeo file system, only the first 64 charac-
ters can be displayed.
The folder selection sequence for playback
and other operations becomes the writing
sequence used by the writing software. For
this reason, the expected sequence at the
time of playback may not coincide with the
actual playback sequence. However, there
also is some writing software which per-
mits setting of the playback order.
!
!
!
!
!
WMA additional information
!
This unit plays back WMA files encoded by
Windows Media Player version 7, 7.1, 8, 9
and 10.
You can play back WMA files in the fre-
quencies from 8 kHz to 48 kHz.
This unit can play recordings with bit rates
from 5 kbps to 320 kbps.
!
!
170
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
Appendix
!
This unit doesn’t support the following for-
mats:
— Windows Media Audio 9 Professional
(5.1ch)
— Windows Media Audio 9 Lossless
— Windows Media Audio 9 Voice
AAC additional information
!
!
!
This unit plays back AAC files encoded by
iTunes® version 4.6.
This unit plays back AAC files in the sam-
pling frequencies from 8 kHz to 48 kHz.
This unit can play recordings with trans-
mission rates from 8 kbps to 320 kbps.
About folders and MP3/WMA/AAC files
!
An outline of a disc with MP3/WMA/AAC
files on it is shown below. Subfolders are
shown as folders in the folder currently se-
lected.
p The following figure is an example of the
tier structure in the disc. The numbers in
the figure indicate the order in which folder
numbers are assigned and the order to be
played back.
1
2
3
1 First tier
2 Second tier
3 Third tier
Indicates the order in which folder num-
bers are assigned.
Indicates each file. The number is as-
signed in the order of the track to be played
back.
Notes
!
!
This unit assigns folder numbers. The user
cannot assign folder numbers.
It is not possible to check folders that do not
include MP3/WMA/AAC files. (These folders
will be skipped without displaying the folder
number.)
!
It is possible to play back up to 255 folders on
one disc.
DivX video files
!
This unit corresponds to DivX video format
implemented in relation to DivX standards.
However, it does not correspond to DivX
Ultra standards.
!
This unit corresponds to MP3 and AC3
audio codec.
171
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
Appendix
!
!
DivX files without video data cannot be re-
cognized as DivX file.
Depending on the file information composi-
tion such as the number of audio stream,
there may be a slight delay in the start of
playback on discs.
Some special operation may be prohibited
because of the composition of DivX files.
DivX files downloaded only from DivX part-
ner site are guarantee of proper operation.
Unauthorized DivX file may not operate
properly.
DRM rental file cannot be operated until
starting playing back.
This unit corresponds to a DivX file display
up to 1 590 minutes 43 seconds. Also,
search operation beyond this time limit is
prohibited.
This unit corresponds to media with a maxi-
mum image size of 720 × 576 pixels.
If a file contains more than 4 GB, playback
is stopped on the way.
Files with high transfer rates may not be
played back correctly. The standard transfer
rate is 4 Mbps for CDs and 10.08 Mbps for
DVDs.
DivX subtitle files
!
Srt format subtitle files with the extension
“.srt” can be used.
!
Only one subtitle file can be used for each
DivX file. Multiple subtitle files cannot be
associated.
!
!
!
Subtitle files that are named with the same
character string as the DivX file before the
extension are associated with the DivX file.
The character strings before the extension
must be exactly the same. However, if there
is only one DivX file and one subtitle file in
a single folder, the files are associated even
if the file names are not the same.
The subtitle file must be stored in the same
folder as the DivX file.
Up to 255 subtitle files may be used. Any
more subtitle files will not be recognized.
Up to 64 characters can be used for the
name of the subtitle file, including the ex-
tension. If more than 64 characters are
used for the file name, the subtitle file may
not be recognized.
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
The character code for the subtitle file
should comply with ISO-8859-1. Using char-
acters other than ISO-8859-1 may cause the
characters to be displayed incorrectly.
The subtitles may not be displayed correctly
if the displayed characters in the subtitle
file include control code.
For materials that use a high transfer rate,
the subtitles and video may not be comple-
tely synchronized.
!
DivX VOD file playback requires ID code of
this unit to DivX VOD provider. About ID
!
!
!
!
!
Plays all versions of DivX® video (including
DivX® 6) with standard playback of DivX®
media files.
For more details about DivX, visit the follow-
ing site:
http://www.divx.com/
If multiple subtitles are programmed to dis-
play within a very short time frame, such as
0.1 seconds, the subtitles may not be dis-
played at the correct time.
Important
!
!
When naming a DivX video file, add the corre-
sponding filename extension (.avi or .divx).
The navigation system plays back files with
the filename extension (.avi or .divx) as a DivX
video file. To prevent noise and malfunctions,
do not use these extensions for files other
than DivX video files.
Ambient conditions for playing
a disc
!
At extremely high temperatures, a tempera-
ture cutout protects this product by switch-
ing it off automatically.
172
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
Appendix
!
Despite our careful design of the product,
small scratches that do not affect actual
operation may appear on the disc surface
as a result of mechanical wear, ambient
conditions for use or handling of the disc.
This is not a sign of the malfunction of this
product. Consider it to be normal wear and
tear.
!
The LCD screen should be used within the
temperature ranges shown below:
— Operating temperature range: +14 °F to
+122 °F
— Storage temperature range: -4 °F to
+176 °F
Do not use the LCD screen at temperatures
higher or lower than the operating tem-
perature range because the LCD screen
may not operate normally and the LCD
screen can be damaged.
The LCD screen is exposed in order to in-
crease its visibility within the vehicle.
Please do not press strongly on it as this
may damage it.
!
!
Using the Navigation
System Correctly
WARNING
!
!
!
If liquid or foreign matter should get inside
this navigation system, park your vehicle to
safe place and turn the ignition switch off
(ACC OFF) immediately and consult your deal-
er or the nearest authorized Pioneer Service
Station. Do not use the navigation system in
this condition because doing so may result in
a fire, electric shock, or other failure.
!
!
Do not push the LCD screen with excessive
force as this may scratch it.
Never touch the LCD screen with anything
besides your finger when operating the
Touch Panel functions. The LCD screen can
scratch easily. (The stylus is supplied for
special calibrations. Do not use the stylus
for normal operation.)
If you notice smoke, a strange noise or smell
from the navigation system, or any other ab-
normal signs on the LCD screen, turn off the
power immediately and consult your dealer or
the nearest authorized Pioneer Service Sta-
tion. Using this navigation system in this con-
dition may result in permanent damage to the
system.
Do not disassemble or modify this navigation
system, as there are high-voltage components
inside which may cause an electric shock. Be
sure to consult your dealer or the nearest
authorized Pioneer Service Station for internal
inspection, adjustments or repairs.
Liquid crystal display (LCD) screen
!
If the LCD screen is near the vent of an air
conditioner, make sure that air from the air
conditioner is not blowing on it. Heat from
the heater may break the LCD screen, and
cool air from the cooler may cause moist-
ure to form inside the navigation unit, re-
sulting in possible damage. Also, if the
LCD screen is cooled down by the air con-
ditioner, the LCD screen may become dark
or the life span of the small fluorescent
tube used in the LCD screen may be shor-
tened.
!
!
Small black dots or white dots (bright dots)
may appear on the LCD screen. These are
due to the characteristics of the LCD
screen and do not indicate a problem with
the LCD screen.
At low temperatures, the LCD screen may
be dark for a while after the power is turned
on.
Handling the LCD screen
!
When the LCD screen is subjected to direct
sunlight for a long period of time, it will be-
come very hot, resulting in possible da-
mage to the LCD screen. When not using
this navigation system, avoid exposing it to
direct sunlight as much as possible.
173
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
Appendix
!
!
The LCD screen will be difficult to see if it is
exposed to direct sunlight.
CAUTION
When a route is calculated, the route and voice
guidance for the route are automatically set.
Also, for day or time traffic regulations, only infor-
mation about traffic regulations at the time when
the route was calculated is shown. One-way
streets and street closures may not be taken into
consideration. For example, if a street is open dur-
ing the morning only, but you arrive later, it would
be against the traffic regulations so you cannot
drive along the set route. When driving, please
follow the actual traffic signs. Also, the system
may not know some traffic regulations.
When using a cellular phone, keep the an-
tenna of the cellular phone away from the
LCD screen to prevent disruption of the
video by the appearance of spots, colored
stripes, etc.
Keeping the LCD screen in good
condition
!
When removing dust from the LCD screen
or cleaning the LCD screen, first turn the
system power off, then wipe with a soft dry
cloth.
!
When wiping the LCD screen, take care not
to scratch the surface. Do not use harsh or
abrasive chemical cleaners.
About singular route calculation
When the calculation of only one route is set,
you can search a route option by combining
the following conditions.
For details concerning operations, refer to
For example, when [Fast] and [Avoid Free-
way] ([On]) are combined, a route that avoids
freeways and has the shortest travel time will
be calculated and displayed on the screen.
Condition 1: whether to put priority on dis-
tance or time
Small fluorescent tube
!
A small fluorescent tube is used inside the
display to illuminate the LCD screen.
— The fluorescent tube should last for ap-
proximately 10 000 hours, depending on
operating conditions. (Using the naviga-
tion unit at low temperatures reduces
the service life of the fluorescent tube.)
— When the fluorescent tube reaches the
end of its useful life, the LCD screen will
be dark and the image will no longer be
projected. If this happens, consult your
dealer or the nearest authorized Pioneer
service station.
Short:
Calculate a route with the shortest distance to
your destination as a priority.
Fast:
Calculate a route with the shortest travel time
to your destination as a priority.
Condition 2: whether to use freeway or not
Avoid Freeway:
Calculate a route that avoids freeways. (A
route using the freeway may be set if your des-
tination is far away.)
Route Setting Information
Route search specifications
Your navigation system sets a route to your
destination by applying certain built-in rules to
the map data. This section provides some use-
ful information about how a route is set.
174
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
Appendix
!
!
The system assumes that the driver de-
viated either intentionally or inadvertently
from the route and searches for another
route (intelligent rerouting). Depending on
the situation, the system may search for a
new route that does not return to the origi-
nal one.
The calculated route is one example of the
route to your destination decided by the na-
vigation system while taking the type of
streets or traffic regulations into account. It
is not necessarily an optimum route. (In
some cases, you may not be able to set the
streets you want to pass. If you want to
pass a certain street, set the way point on
that street.)
The route set by your navigation system is
based on the assumption that the driver
does not know the area. Thus, streets
known to local drivers, such as small
streets or special roads, may not be used
for the set route.
Some route options may become the same
route. If way points are set, only one route
is calculated.
!
!
In some cases, guidance may direct you
past your destination and then indicate a
U-turn to get back to it.
In some cases, a route may begin on the
opposite side of a railway or river from your
actual current location. If this happens,
drive towards your destination for a while,
and try route calculation again.
In the following cases, a route that passes
through an Area to Avoid may be set:
— when your vehicle is in the Area to
Avoid
!
— when your destination or way points are
in the Area to Avoid
— when it is not possible to avoid doing so
If a suitable route cannot be set in compli-
ance with the specified detour distance, or
your preference to avoid freeways, toll
roads or ferry routes, the setting or para-
meter may be ignored.
When there is a traffic congestion or clo-
sure ahead, if driving through the traffic
congestion or closure is better than taking
the detour, a detour route may not be set.
There may be instances when the starting
point and the destination point are not on
the highlighted route.
The number of traffic circle exits displayed
on the screen may differ from the actual
number of roads.
If the intersection is approached in a gentle
curve, the map displayed may differ from
the actual road layout.
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
Route setting is limited to the range of the
disc in use.
The destination is too far, there may be in-
stances where the route cannot be set. (If
you want to set a long-distance route going
across several areas, set way points along
the way.)
!
During voice guidance, turns and intersec-
tions from the freeway are announced.
However, some intersections, turns, and
other guide points may not be announced
if they are passed in rapid succession.
It is possible that guidance may direct you
off a freeway and then back on again.
In some cases, the set route may require
you to travel in the opposite direction of
your current heading. In such cases, you
are instructed to turn around; please do so
safely and in accordance with local traffic
rules.
Auto Reroute
!
Auto Reroute is used when you deviate
more than 0.01 mile (30 m) from the route.
The Auto Reroute function does not work in
the following cases:
— when your vehicle is not on a street
— when you are very close to your destina-
tion
— when your vehicle is on a ferry
— when driving on a road inside a facility
— when driving on a traffic circle
!
!
!
175
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
Appendix
— when your vehicle is out of Memory
area
— when the vehicle goes out of the area
stored in the disc during DVD naviga-
tion mode
Types of the Road Stored in
the Disc
There are three types of roads marked on the
map of this disc.
— when the vehicle goes out of the mem-
orized area during memory navi mode
— when driving on routes described in
Roads included in the route
guidance and roads not included
Turn by Turn Routable Roads contain full attri-
bute data and can be used for full Route Gui-
dance. Pioneer Navigation will display full
route guidance, including turn-by-turn voice
directions and arrow icons.
Route highlighting
!
Once set, the route is highlighted in bright
green or light blue on the map.
Routable roads (routes displayed and
highlighted in purple) have only basic data
and can only be used to plot a navigable route.
Pioneer Navigation will only display a navig-
able route on the map (only the arrival gui-
dance for the destination or a way point is
available). Please review and obey all local traf-
fic rules along the highlighted route. (For your
safety.)
!
The immediate vicinity of your starting
point and destination may not be high-
lighted, and neither will areas with particu-
larly complex road layouts. Consequently,
the route may appear to be cut off on the
display, but voice guidance will continue.
Roads not used in calculations
Even though displayed onscreen, the following
roads are not included in route calculations:
No turn-by-turn directions or arrow icons will
be displayed on these roads.
!
!
!
!
Stubble roads
Walkways
Roads for public vehicles only
Non routable road
When your vehicle reaches to the entrance of
this road, the icon will be displayed, indicat-
ing that guidance is not available for this type
of road. The icon will be indicated for the
road with which the guidance is available.
Close-up of Junction function, Auto Reroute
function, Changing the view to Guide View,
or Route View are not available.
Tracking
!
Your navigation system marks your course
on the map in certain increments. This is
called tracking. It is handy when you want
to check a route traveled without guidance
or if returning along a complex route.
A maximum of about 145 miles (230 km) is
marked and, as you travel beyond this limit,
tracking marks are erased, starting with the
oldest. The tracking display shows about
100 miles of vehicle tracking with white
dots.
Non routable roads (pink color
road)
Map display is possible, but it cannot be used
for route calculation. Please review and obey
all local traffic rules along this route. (For your
safety.)
!
= For details concerning operations, refer to
176
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
Appendix
Display Information
*1: If you touch [Restore Factory Settings],
the registered POI Shortcuts return to the de-
fault or factory settings.
*2: If you touch [Restore Factory Settings],
the setting value return to the default or fac-
tory settings.
Page
Traffic On Route
Traffic Events
Traffic Flow*2
Traffic Settings*2
XM Status
Stock Info
NAVI MENU
Destination
Set My Favorites
My Favorites
Emergency Info
Overlay POI*1
Route Options
Page
Address Search
Return Home
Go to
POI Search
Page
Vicinity Search*1
Address Book
Destination History
Freeway Search
Telephone Search
Cancel Route
Edit Current Route
View Current Route
Recalculate
Number of Routes*2
Route Condition*2
Avoid Freeway*2
Avoid Ferry*2
Info/Traffic
Avoid Toll Road*2
Designate Areas to Avoid
177
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
Appendix
Settings
Shortcut menu
p The shortcuts displayed onscreen can be
changed. The shortcuts described here are
those that can be selected with the system
as default setting.
p Items marked with an asterisk (*3) cannot
be removed from Shortcut menu.
Page
Shortcut menu
Volume*2
System Options
Page
Language Selection
: Destination*3
: Change Route*3
Reroute
KM / Mile Setting*2
Average Speed*2
Background Picture Setting
Read from Disc
Cancel Route
Route Profile
Route Scroll
Shortcut menu
Map Display Options*2
Tracking Display*2
AV Guide Mode*2
Day/Night Display*2
Close-up of Junction*2
Arrow in AV*2
Skip Way Point
1 km (mile) - 50 km (mile) de-
tour
: Registration
: Vicinity Search*1
: Volume Setting
: Whole Route Overview
: Overlay POI*1
: Address Book
: Route Options
Route Options
Defined Locations
Set ”Home”
Map in Memory
Set ”Go To”
Demo Mode*2
: Edit Current Route
: Traffic On Route
: Stock Info
Time
Modify Current Location
Hardware Info
: Set My Favorites
: My Favorites
Connection Status
3D Calibration
Service Info Screen
Restore Factory Settings
178
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
Appendix
System menu
Menu in the AV Screen
Sound menu
Page
AV1 Input
AV2 Input
Camera
Page
FAD/BAL (Balance)
EQ Menu
Camera
Staging
Polarity
Loudness
Antenna Control
Wide Mode
V.Adjust
Sub Woofer (Non Fading)
HPF
SLA
Screen Off
Illumi Color
Screen Color
Initial menu
Function menu
DVD-V
Page
Rear SP
Rear SP
Preout
Page
PIN Edit
Repeat
Mute Input/Guide
5.1CH
L/R Select
DVD/DivX Setup
179
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
Appendix
SIRIUS
iPod
Page
Page
Memo
Repeat
Game Alert
Game Info
Shuffle
Wide Screen
iPod Charge
BT-TEL
BT-AUDIO
Page
Phone Connect
Phone Register
Phonebook Transfer
Phonebook Name View
Clear Memory
Auto Answer
Page
Connection Open
Disconnect
Device Info
Refuse All Calls
Ring Tone
Auto Connect
Echo Cancel
181
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
Appendix
DVD/DivX Setup menu
Glossary
3D Hybrid sensor
The built-in sensor which enables the system
to estimate your vehicle’s position. A learning
function increases its accuracy and its learn-
ing data can be stored in memory.
AAC
AAC is short for Advanced Audio Coding and
refers to an audio compression technology
standard used with MPEG 2 and MPEG 4.
Page
Language
Subtitle Language
Audio Language
Menu Language
Assist Subtitle
Multi Angle
TV Aspect
Address Book
A list of locations registered manually.
Aspect ratio
This is the width-to-height ratio of a TV screen.
A regular display has an aspect ratio of 4:3.
Wide screen displays have an aspect ratio of
16:9, providing a bigger picture for exceptional
presence and atmosphere.
Parental
DivX VOD
Bit rate
Auto Play
This expresses data volume per second, or bps
units (bits per second). The higher the rate,
the more information is available to reproduce
the sound. Using the same encoding method
(such as MP3), the higher the rate, the better
the sound.
Subtitle File
Chapter
DVD titles are divided into chapters which are
numbered in the same way as the chapters of
a book. With DVD-Video discs featuring chap-
ters, you can quickly find a desired scene with
chapter search.
Current location
The present location of your vehicle; your cur-
rent location is shown on the map by a red tri-
angle.
Default setting
A factory setting which applies when you first
switch on the system; you can change default
settings to suit your own needs in Route Op-
tions menu or Settings menu.
182
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
Appendix
Destination
Guidance mode
A location you choose as the end point of your
journey.
The mode in which guidance is given as you
drive to your destination; the system automati-
cally switches to this mode as soon as a route
has been set.
DivX
DivX is a popular media technology created by
DivX, Inc. DivX media files contain highly com-
pressed video with high visual quality that
maintains a relatively small file size. DivX files
can also include advanced media features like
menus, subtitles, and alternate audio tracks.
Many DivX media files are available for down-
load online, and you can create your own
using your personal content and easy-to-use
tools from DivX.com.
Guidance point
These are important landmarks along your
route, generally intersections. The next gui-
dance point along your route is indicated on
the map by the yellow flag icon.
Home location
Your registered home location.
ID3 tag
This is a method of embedding track-related
information in a MP3 file. This embedded in-
formation can include the track title, the ar-
tist’s name, the album title, the music genre,
the year of production, comments and other
data. The contents can be freely edited using
software with ID3 Tag editing functions.
Although the tags are restricted to the number
of characters, the information can be viewed
when the track is played back.
DivX Certified
DivX Certified products are officially tested by
the creators of DivX and guaranteed to play all
versions of DivX video, including DivX 6.
Dolby Digital
Dolby Digital provides multi-channel audio
from up to 5.1 independent channels. This is
the same as the Dolby Digital surround sound
system used in theaters.
DRM
ISO9660 format
This technology preserves the copyrights for
digital data by limiting the number of copies
that can be made for audio and video files.
This is the international standard for the for-
mat logic of DVD/CD-ROM folders and files.
For the ISO9660 format, there are regulations
for the following two levels:
DVD Map Discs
Level 1:
The DVD-ROM discs contain Pioneer naviga-
tion software. Map data is also recorded on
the discs.
The file name is in 8.3 format (the name con-
sists of up to 8 characters, half-byte English
capital letters, half-byte numerals and the “_”
sign, with a file-extension of three characters).
Level 2:
The file name can have up to 31 characters (in-
cluding the separation mark “.” and a file ex-
tension). Each folder contains less than 8
hierarchies.
Extended formats
Joliet:
File names can have up to 64 characters.
Romeo:
Favorite location
A frequently visited location (such as your
workplace or a relative’s home) that you can
register to allow easy routing.
GPS
Global Positioning System. A network of satel-
lites that provides navigation signals for a vari-
ety of purposes.
File names can have up to 128 characters.
183
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
Appendix
JPEG
Multi-session
This stands for Joint Photographic Experts
Group, and is an international still image com-
pression standard.
Multi-session is a recording method that al-
lows additional data to be recorded later.
When recording data on a CD-ROM, etc., all
data from beginning to end is treated as a sin-
gle unit or session. Multi-session is a method
of recording more than 2 sessions on one
disc.
Linear PCM (LPCM)/Pulse code
modulation
This stands for linear pulse code modulation,
which is the signal recording system used for
music CDs and DVDs. Generally, DVDs are re-
corded with higher sampling frequency and
bit rate than CDs. Therefore, DVDs can provide
higher sound quality.
Multi-subtitle
Subtitles in up to 32 languages can be re-
corded on a single DVD, letting you choose as
desired.
m3u
Optical digital output
Playlists created using the “WINAMP” soft-
ware have a playlist file extension (.m3u).
By transmitting audio signals in a digital sig-
nal format, the chance of sonic quality dete-
riorating in the course of transmission is
minimized. An optical digital output is de-
signed to transmit digital signals optically.
MP3
MP3 is short for MPEG Audio Layer 3. It is an
audio compression standard set by a working
group (MPEG) of the ISO (International Stan-
dards Organization). MP3 is able to compress
audio data to about 1/10th the size of a con-
ventional disc.
Packet write
This is a general term for a method of writing
on CD-R, etc. at the time required for a file,
just as is done with files on floppy or hard
discs.
MPEG
This stands for Moving Pictures Experts
Group, and is an international video image
compression standard. Some DVDs feature di-
gital audio compressed and recorded using
this system.
Parental lock
Some DVD-Video discs with violent or adult-or-
iented scenes feature parental lock which pre-
vents children from viewing such scenes. With
this kind of disc, if you set the unit’s parental
lock level, playback of scenes inappropriate for
children will be disabled, or these scenes will
be skipped.
Multi-angle
With regular TV programs, although multiple
cameras are used to simultaneously shoot
scenes, only images from one camera at a
time are transmitted to your TV. Some DVDs
feature scenes shot from multiple angles, let-
ting you choose your viewing angle as desired.
Point of Interest (POI)
Point Of Interest; any of a range of locations
stored in the data, such as railway stations,
shops, restaurants, and amusement parks.
Multi-audio (Multilingual dialog)
Some DVDs feature dialog recorded in multi-
ple languages. Dialog in up to 8 languages
can be recorded on a single disc, letting you
choose as desired.
Region number
DVD players and DVD discs feature region
numbers indicating the area in which they
were purchased. Playback of a DVD is not pos-
sible unless it features the same region num-
ber as the DVD player.
184
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
Appendix
Route setting
Corporation in the United States and/or other
countries.
The process of determining the ideal route to a
specific location; route setting is done auto-
matically by the system when you specify a
destination.
Set route
The route marked out by the system to your
destination. It is highlighted on the map.
Title
DVD-Video discs have a high data capacity, en-
abling recording of multiple movies on a sin-
gle disc. If, for example, one disc contains
three separate movies, they are divided into
title 1, title 2 and title 3. This lets you enjoy the
convenience of title search and other func-
tions.
Tracking
Dots on the map indicating the route you have
traveled.
VBR
VBR is short for variable bit rate. Generally
speaking CBR (constant bit rate) is more
widely used. But by flexibly adjusting the bit
rate according to the needs of the audio com-
pression, it is possible to achieve compression
with a priority on sound quality.
Voice guidance
The giving of directions by a recorded voice in
guidance mode.
Way Point
A location that you choose to visit before your
destination; a journey can be built up from
multiple way points and the destination.
WMA
WMA is short for Windows Media™ Audio
and refers to an audio compression technol-
ogy that is developed by Microsoft
Corporation.
WMA data can be encoded by using Windows
Media Player version 7 or later.
Windows Media and the Windows logo are tra-
demarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft
185
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
Appendix
Weight ................................ 105 g (0.23 lbs)
Specifications
Display
General
Screen size/aspect ratio ....... 7 inch wide/16:9
(effective display area:
Rated power source ............... 14.4 V DC
(allowable voltage range:
10.8 V to 15.1 V DC)
Grounding system ................... Negative type
156 mm × 89 mm) (6-1/8 in.
× 3-1/2 in.)
Pixels ............................................. 336 960 (1 440 × 234)
Type ................................................ TFT active matrix, transmis-
sive type
Max. current consumption
........................................... 10.0 A
Display unit:
Color system .............................. NTSC compatible
Operating temperature range
Dimensions (W × H × D):
DIN
..................................................... +14 °F to +122 °F
Storage temperature range
Chassis ..................... 178 mm × 50 mm ×
160 mm
..................................................... -4 °F to +176 °F
Angle adjustment .................... 50° to 110°
(initial settings: 90°)
(7 in. × 2 in. × 6-1/4 in.)
Nose ........................... 188 mm × 58 mm × 33 mm
(7-3/8 in. × 2-1/4 in. ×
1-3/8 in.)
Audio
D
Continuous power output is 22 W per channel minimum
into 4 ohms, both channels driven 50 Hz to 15 000 Hz
with no more than 5% THD.
Maximum power output ....... 50 W × 4
50 W × 2 ch/4 W + 70 W ×
1 ch/2 W (for subwoofer)
Chassis ..................... 178 mm × 50 mm ×
165 mm
(7 in. × 2 in. × 6-1/2 in.)
Nose ........................... 170 mm × 46 mm × 28 mm
(6-3/4 in. × 1-3/4 in. ×
1-1/4 in.)
Load impedance ...................... 4 W (4 W to 8 W [2 W for 1 ch]
allowable)
Weight ................................ 2.3 kg (5.1 lbs)
Hideaway unit:
Preout max output level/output impedance
..................................................... 1.7 V/1 kohm
Equalizer (3-Band Parametric Equalizer):
Low
Dimensions (W × H × D):
..................................... 180 mm × 30 mm ×
140 mm
(5-7/8 in. × 1-1/8 in. ×
3-7/8 in.)
Weight ................................ 0.7 kg (1.5 lbs)
Frequency ................ 40 Hz/80 Hz/100 Hz/160 Hz
Q Factor .................... 0.35/0.59/0.95/1.15 (+6 dB
when boosted)
Gain ............................ 12 dB
Mid
Navigation
GPS Receiver:
System ................................ L1, C/Acode GPS
SPS (Standard Positioning
Frequency ................ 200 Hz/500 Hz/1 kHz/2 kHz
Q Factor .................... 0.35/0.59/0.95/1.15 (+6 dB
when boosted)
Service)
Reception system .......... 8-channel multi-channel re-
ception system
Gain ............................ 12 dB
High
Frequency ................ 3.15 kHz/8 kHz/10 kHz/
12.5 kHz
Q Factor .................... 0.35/0.59/0.95/1.15 (+6 dB
when boosted)
Reception frequency .... 1 575.42 MHz
Sensitivity .......................... –130 dBm
Position update frequency
........................................... Approx. once per second
Gain ............................ 12 dB
Loudness contour:
GPS antenna:
Antenna ............................. Micro strip flat antenna/
right-handed helical polari-
sation
Low ....................................... +3.5 dB (100 Hz), +3 dB
(10 kHz)
Mid ....................................... +10 dB (100 Hz), +6.5 dB
(10 kHz)
High ..................................... +11 dB (100 Hz), +11 dB
(10 kHz)
Antenna cable ................. 5.0 m (16 ft. 5 in.)
Dimensions (W × H × D)
........................................... 33 mm × 13 mm × 36 mm
(1-1/4 in. × 1/2 in. ×
(volume: –30 dB)
1-3/8 in.)
186
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
Appendix
HPF:
AM tuner
Frequency range ...................... 530 kHz to 1 710 kHz
(10 kHz)
Usable sensitivity ..................... 18 µV (S/N: 20 dB)
Signal-to-noise ratio ............... 65 dB (IHF-A network)
Frequency .......................... 50 Hz/80 Hz/125 Hz
Slope .................................... –12 dB/oct
Subwoofer:
Frequency .......................... 50 Hz/80 Hz/125 Hz
Slope .................................... –18 dB/oct
Gain ...................................... 12 dB
Note
Phase .................................. Normal/Reverse
Specifications and design are subject to possible
modifications without notice due to im-
provements.
DVD Drive
System .......................................... DVD-Video, Compact disc
audio, MP3, WMA, AAC,
DivX system
Usable discs .............................. DVD-Video, Compact disc,
MP3, WMA, AAC, DivX
Region number ........................ 1
Signal format:
Sampling frequency ..... 44.1 kHz/48 kHz/96 kHz
Number of quantization bits
........................................... 16/20/24; linear
Frequency response ............... 5 Hz to 44 000 Hz (with DVD,
at sampling frequency
96 kHz)
Signal-to-noise ratio ............... 97 dB (1 kHz) (IHF-A net-
work)
(CD: 96 dB (1 kHz) (IHF-A
network))
Dynamic range ......................... 95 dB (1 kHz) (CD: 94 dB
(1 kHz))
Distortion ..................................... 0.008 % (1 kHz)
Output level:
Video .................................... 1.0 Vp-p/75 W ( 0.2 V)
Audio ................................... 1.0 V (1 kHz, 0 dB)
Number of channels .............. 2 (stereo)
MP3 decoding format ........... MPEG-1 & 2 Audio Layer 3
WMA decoding format ......... Ver.9.0 L3
AAC decoding format ............ MPEG-4 AAC (only encoded
by iTunes):
.m4a
DivX decoding format ............ Home Theater Ver.3, Ver.4,
Ver.5.2 :
.avi, .divx
FM tuner
Frequency range ...................... 87.9 MHz to 107.9 MHz
Usable sensitivity ..................... 8 dBf (0.7 µV/75 W, mono,
S/N: 30 dB)
Signal-to-noise ratio ............... 75 dB (IHF-A network)
Distortion ..................................... 0.3 % (at 65 dBf, 1 kHz,
stereo)
0.1 % (at 65 dBf, 1 kHz,
mono)
Frequency response ............... 30 Hz to 15 000 Hz ( 3 dB)
Stereo separation .................... 45 dB (at 65 dBf, 1 kHz)
187
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PIONEER CORPORATION
4-1, MEGURO 1-CHOME, MEGURO-KU
TOKYO 153-8654, JAPAN
PIONEER ELECTRONICS (USA) INC.
P.O. Box 1540, Long Beach, California 90801-1540, U.S.A.
TEL: (800) 421-1404
PIONEER EUROPE NV
Haven 1087, Keetberglaan 1, B-9120 Melsele, Belgium
TEL: (0) 3/570.05.11
PIONEER ELECTRONICS ASIACENTRE PTE. LTD.
253 Alexandra Road, #04-01, Singapore 159936
TEL: 65-6472-7555
PIONEER ELECTRONICS AUSTRALIA PTY. LTD.
178-184 Boundary Road, Braeside, Victoria 3195, Australia
TEL: (03) 9586-6300
PIONEER ELECTRONICS OF CANADA, INC.
300 Allstate Parkway, Markham, Ontario L3R 0P2, Canada
TEL: 1-877-283-5901
TEL: 905-479-4411
PIONEER ELECTRONICS DE MEXICO, S.A. de C.V.
Blvd.Manuel Avila Camacho 138 10 piso
Col.Lomas de Chapultepec, Mexico, D.F. 11000
TEL:55-9178-4270
先鋒股份有限公司
總公司 : 台北市中山北路二段44號13樓
電話 : (02) 2521-3588
先鋒電子(香港)有限公司
香港九龍尖沙咀海港城世界商業中心9樓901-6室
電話 : (0852) 2848-6488
Published by Pioneer Corporation.
Copyright © 2008 by Pioneer Corporation.
All rights reserved.
Printed in China
<KMZZX> <08J00000>
<CRB2738-B/U> UC
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|
Philips Bottle Warmer SCF643 12 User Manual
Philips Network Router SBCLI1000 User Manual
Pioneer Stereo System VSX 915 K User Manual
Planar Car Video System PT1710MX User Manual
Plasmon Computer Drive MOD 910 User Manual
Polar Heart Rate Monitor FS1 User Manual
Polaroid MP3 Player PMP283C 4 User Manual
Poulan Lawn Mower 179075 User Manual
Poulan Trimmer PL 200 User Manual
ProForm Treadmill PFTL790070 User Manual